Home

RD-MV200 Series Recorder User Manual

1. Changing groups j Auto scroll ON OFF Changing groups Switching screens Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4 TREND a DIGITAL 4 BAR GRAPH lt gt lt P lt gt v lt gt a v Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 lt gt Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the screen Follow the procedures below when a different operation screen is being displayed 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select Trend Digital or Bar Graph using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key TREND gt GROUP_1 Ei DIGITAL gt GROUP 1 ul aR gt GROUP 1 4 Lil Fe tLe ce E r ow 2 4 Select the group using the up and down arrow keys 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 5 su 19 5 uopesado BulyoyMsS gt 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Trend Horizontal Display Display rate See Section 7 3 Imih div 1 6 1 8 2 0 Tag Channel no E 0 357 Measured computed value E AHL IL Unit _ 2 O OOO is 0 358 E E HE y E C C 0 4 2 0 359 oo y Rir
2. LAmintdiv J ALLL dd 1 6 8 20 f EE 0 065 E E E MHHICIC y 09 i2 E Ws E 0 066 EEE EE y 03 04 alesis 0 066 eG Kr v E EO 03E 4 0 067 E E E HH y E E E ps 0 068 pose E V TAI TTT 4 i9iii Hessa V E E E E E E 0 069 19 06 1 19 19 11 19 1 1 1 6 1 8 2 0 V T Waveforms for all channels that are Data from selected group registered to display the trend are displayed 4 8 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Changing the group on the display screen The following three methods are available If all channel display is selected waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed even when the group is changed e Changing the group on the display screen from the screen menu ile Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select the group using the up and down arrow keys 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the selected group To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key e Changing the group on the display screen using the arrow keys 1 The displayed group changes in the order Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 and so on by pressing the right arrow key on the trend digital and bar graph screens 2 By pressing the left arrow key the displayed gro
3. a Upper case alphabet Lower case alphabet Symbols Key Pressed once Twice Three times Four times asc A a B b C c _2 DEF D d E e F f 30u Gig H h i 4a J i K k L I 5mo M m N n O 0 6 Pan P p Q q R r Zsu S s T t U u 8w vv W w X x 9 vz Yy Z z E73 O w a 0 Copying clearing character strings Procedure When entering a character string in the basic setting mode or the setting mode you can copy and paste a preexisting string You can also clear a selected string The soft keys used to perform these operations appear only when these operations are appropriate Copying a character strings To copy a character string to another box follow the procedures below Move the cursor to the copy source string and press the Copy soft key Move the cursor to the copy destination box and press the Paste soft key The character string is copied Po Input Clear Copy Paste Clearing the character string 1 To clear the character string press the Clear soft key 3 23 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 7 Setting the Date and Time Procedure Set the date and time The set date and time can be specified whether it belong to the summer time or the winter time The
4. Contents Chapter 5 Measurement Channel Settings Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 Voltage Input Setting s sesissts ivis cccsets devcserscenene recuse tcbassevactadiuse cue ctasestareeceaevdecnsevvanedieuiveerans Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting Digital Input Dl Setting wcs cc sdccccscccsccssccasiacdssscsszessssdcascesscesecsuessedeseuicnsses sts osstenddesrectvaersbens Difference Computation Delta Setting 0 eee eee eee sneeneeeeece eee 5 7 Saling SOTO esac suds sstekh cactiteee emtintein E N an lamenting Geass Square Root Computation Setting SKIP SONG EE ET Input Filter and Moving Average Setting s serrerresrsrerrsrrercorserersensensreeesenensrarenenerareeene 5 14 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting Mode sssrinin aiidata inadai 5 15 Acknowledging and Setting Alarms 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option 0 0 0 eee 6 1 PALAIS eting aesan a aere e AS EE SEE TaS Setting the Alarm Delay Period cccccsscsccssssescesessessscusecasseassanessacsensassaaessasaasansaeteass Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Setting and Operating the Display 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 Soing tag Name Siasea eae E eae r rA E E T 7 1
5. 0 618 Bar Graph Horizontal Display Starting point of the bar center Lower limit of span Bar graph Upper limit of span l i 2 000 2 008 TAG B1 Tag Channel no l 1 389 Measured computed value Alarm point ee y Unit mark 2 000 2 000 TAG 02 Alarm mark aaa H 963 alarm type OOH L 2 000 2 008 TAG 83 0 483 cn 2 000 2 000 TAG B I 0 034 ny 2 000 2 000 TAG 65 T n I 0 551 MaA l 2 000 2 008 TAG B6 1 030 i y Bar Graph Vertical Display Tag Channel no TAG 81 TAG 82 TAG 83 TAG B4 TAG 85 TAG 86 Doom HH oa Alarm mark 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 Upper limit of span Alarm point mark _7 Scale Bar graph 23 _ Unit f 78 Co ESR eri ener C RR cA T Lower limit of span Measured computed value B 749 8 243 9 278 8 781 1 231 1 597 4 7 su 19 5 uopesado HulyIMS gt 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Displaying or clearing the scale on the trend screen This operation is carried out on the Trend screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu Trend
6. Ke Trigger activated When the internal memory is divided into blocks An event data file each in the blocks is created Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped When the trigger is activated again data are acquired and stored to the next block When all blocks are full and the trigger is activated data are overwritten to the first block Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state data are overwritten to the next block Press the STOP key to terminate data acquisition First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition MN MN 1 AMN Trigger wait i Trigger wait i Trigger wait T Trigger activated gt Trigger activated gt Trigger activated Note The event data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary gt Section 4 5 When a power failure occurs the event data file in the internal memory is closed as one file Pretrigger for the event data Pretrigger is applied to the event data with Trigger or Rotate modes You can have event data before the trigger point be stored It is specified in terms of a percentage of the data length 0 5 25 50 75 95 100 If 0 is selected all data are after the trigger po
7. QVQ Y DC Current Input y DC current input Q Shunt resistor NOTE For a 4 to 20 mA input use a shunt resistor of 250 0 1 2 5 OOZAIN GY 24 Bursn 21049 e 2 3 Input Signal Wiring RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Input Terminal Position Terminal Arrangement Clamped Input Terminals CH7 C B gj 5 CH8 C CH3 _CH1 H5 4 H6 CH4 CH2 CH19 CH17 CH15CH13 CH11 hl api b A B l CH20 CH18 CH16 CH14 CH12 CH27 CH25 CH23 CH21 i CH30 CH28 CH26 CH24 CH22 Note For RTD input input terminals A and B are isolated on each channel Terminal b is shorted internally across all channels Screw Terminals CH10 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2 CH9 CH7 _CH5 _CH3__CH1 CH20 CH18 CH16 CH14 CH12 CH19 CH17 CH15 CH13 CH11 b A B 2 3 Input Signal Wiring Wiring Diagram DC Voltage and DI Contact Input oe DC voltage input Q Resistance Temperature Detector Input Lead
8. For details related to the report function see section 11 11 Item Description Report type Select from hourly reports only daily reports only daily and weekly reports and daily and monthly reports Number of channels per report Up to 30 channels Computed data Average maximum minimum and sum Number of reports that can be Up to 40 acquired to the internal memory Data format ASCII format For a display example of report data see section 1 3 1 26 This page intentionally left blank SUOI OUNZ JO MAIAIOAQ 7 1 27 This page intentionally left blank 1 28 1 8 Other Functions USER key Key Lock One of the following functions can be assigned to the USER key Alarm ACK is initially assigned For the setting and operating procedure see section 10 2 and 10 1 respectively Operations that can be assigned SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 Function Operation None None Trigger Provides a key trigger for starting acquiring the event data when Key Trigger is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data gt Section 8 11 Alarm ACK Releases alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold Section 6 4 Math Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 is equipped Section 11 3 Math rst Clears computed results when the computation function M1 is equippe
9. 1 age 2 DEF 3an K USER mew e 4u Smno 6 Par Zsru 6 wx 9 yz m s7 o xe _a C sroP Character number input keys DISP ENTER key Key operations in the basic setting mode Procedure Entering the basic setting mode 1 Press the MENU key to enter the setting mode 2 Hold the FUNC key down for three seconds to enter the basic setting mode 3 Press the soft key to enter individual setting screens Note Basic setting mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress Stop data acquisition and computation first before entering the basic setting mode e Changing and storing the data acquiring method in the basic setting mode Memory and Memory and trend under the 2 menu clears the measured computed data in the internal memory Make sure to save the data to the external storage medium before entering the basic setting mode Common key operations in the basic setting mode are described Alarm A D Temperature r Alarm r AD Ref lash Off Integrate Auto Cursor position Relay Scan interval 1s blue AND None Action Energize Behavior Nonhold Indicator Nonhold Rate of change Increase 2 Decrease 2 Hysteresis On First CH Last CH Jar Jat Burnout set RJC Yolt u Temperature Unit Jc Auto 58Hz 68Hz 168ns l T Setting selecti
10. Handling Precautions Use care when cleaning the RD MV200 especially any plastic parts When cleaning wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner since these may cause discoloring and deformation Keep electrically charged objects away from the RD MV200 as this may cause malfunction Do not apply volatile chemicals to the LCD monitor or panel keys Do not allow rubber and vinyl products to remain in contact with the RD MV200 for long periods of time This may damage the RD MV200 Do not apply shock to the RD MV200 When not in use make sure to turn OFF the power switch If there are any symptoms of trouble such as strange odors or smoke coming from the RD MV200 immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord Then contact Omega CAUTION Don t put any weight on the recorder while it is in reclined position with its front feet up as it may damage the feet Handling precautions of external storage media Take special care in handling external storage media as they are delicate products For general precautions see the instruction manual that came with the external storage medium Floppy disks and Zip disks may not operate properly under high or low temperature environment If you are using the RD MV200 in a low temperature environment less than 10 C let the RD MV200 warm up for at least 30 minutes beforehand If you are using them in a high temperature environment greater
11. Managing Files and Initializing Data Describes how to save and load the setup data manage files on the external storage medium save the data residing in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operations initialize the internal memory and other operations 10 Other Functions Describes how to set and operate key lock key login logout user key and other functions 11 Computation Report Function Option Describes how to use the optional computation report function 12 Troubleshooting Describes the error messages and the troubleshooting measures of the RD MV200 13 Maintenance Describes fuse replacement and other information 14 Specifications Describes the specifications of the RD MV200 Appendix Describes the initial values of the setting mode and basic setting mode file formats of ASCII files Index Note This manual covers information regarding RD MV200s that have a suffix code for language 2 English vii How to Use this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Unit Kca Denotes 1024 Example 768 KB File capacity Konne Denotes 1000 M Denotes 1024K Example 1 44 MB Storage capacity of floppy disks Bens Bytes Example 1 44 MB Storage capacity of floppy disks Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual A Affixed to the instrument Indicates danger to personnel or instrume
12. Setting screen example for the setting mode Cursor position blue Basic setting mode screen on 1 2 3 fore 4 off H oa On 0 First CH Last CH Jer el R ga Span Hode Range Lower Upper ay B 688 1 088 Alarn Relay Type Value On Off Number RTD Scale Delta Next 1 2 Parameter selections selected using the soft keys This screen is used to configure the basic specifications of the various functions such as burnout reference junction compensation A D integration time and the method used to acquire data to the internal memory For details see section 3 5 e Setting screen example for the basic setting mode Alarm A D Temperature Alarn A D Ref lash Off Integrate Auto f Relay Scan interval ls no lone First CH Last CH Action Energize for or Behavior Nonhold Indicator Nonhold one set pi erna Rate of change increase TE Volt uy 8 Decrease 2 Temperature Staras Hysteresis On Unit T Auto 58Hz 68Hz 168ns Parameter selections selected using the soft keys Cursor position blue 1 3 Display Function Setting the Display Conditions of the LCD The following display conditions of the LCD can be configured Screen Attribute Settings Background color of the operation screen You can select white or black for the background color of the screen The initial setting is whit
13. lower limit must be greater than or equal to 5 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 14 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Procedure The scale used on trend and bar graphs can be set When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the base position of the bar graph can be set on each channel by selecting either Normal or Center Normal The left edge or the right edge of the display span depending on which value is smaller Center Position at 50 of the display span For the procedures to set the vertical or horizontal display see section 7 13 The scale display position for each channel can be specified on the trend display These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key OoOo Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key
14. 11 21 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 10 Using the Rolling Average Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key e While the number of samples acquired is less than the specified number of samples the average of acquired data is computed e The computation error data are not included in the rolling average computation e When the measured data exceed the upper and lower limits indicated below the value is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the moving average is calculated The upper and lower limits vary depending on the decimal position of the span upper and lower limits of the computation channel Decimal Position of the Span Upper Lower Limit of the Upper Lower Limit computation channel 100000000 ugodu 10000000 DOO 1000000 000 000 100000 OO 10000 LI OOOOO 1000 11 22 11 11 Overview of the Report Function This function is used to create hourly daily weekly and monthly reports The report data can be displayed on the screen The report data are saved to the external storage medium in ASCII format For data formats see appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Types of reports and specifications Types of reports Hourly report On every hour o
15. Note If you select delay alarm T or t for the alarm type you must set the alarm delay period See section 6 3 4 Value Set the value at which the alarm is activated Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 5 Relay On Off Set whether or not to activate the relay output If On is selected output relay Number is displayed 6 Number Set the output relay number For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position see section 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring Option If the alarm output relay option AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 or A5 is not installed this setting is void Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Alarm type Two types of alarms are available Name Symbol Description Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Lower limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value Delay upper limit alarm T An
16. Sampling interval s Sampling length Event data file Sampling interval Sampling length 17 days 1s 5s 10s 6 9h 34h 2days 30 min 60s 52 days 104 days 5s 30s 6 days 41 days 39 days 78 days 5s 30s 41h 10 days ch 0ch 30 min 60s 34 days 69 days 30s 60s 34 days 69 days 30 min 60s 26 days 52 days 30s 60s 8 days 17 days 480s approx 120s 34 days 14 7 suonesiioeds 14 3 Data Storage Specifications In case measurement ch 30 ch mathematical ch 0 ch Display data file only Display rate min div approx 240 min Sampling interval s Event data file only Sampling interval 5s Sampling length 5 6h 27h Display data file Event data file Display data file Display rate min div 10s 2 days 30s 6 days 60s 13 days 480 s approx 120s 27 days approx 240 min Sampling interval s Sampling length Event data file Sampling interval Sampling length Manual sampled data Trigger Data format ASCII 10s 13h 30s 41h 10 days 60s 3 days 480s approx 120s 6 days Key operation or remote input signals R1 option Max number of data sets internal memory can hold 50 TLOG data M1 option Trigger Data format Binary Timeout of the timer Max number of data sets or files internal memory can hold 400 data sets or 16 files number
17. the remote input signal Contact close 1 open 0 Open collector Voltage level is Lo at the remote terminal 1 Voltage level is Hi at the remote terminal 0 The unit corresponding to the measured computed data in the equation is not compensated In computations measured and computed data are handled as values without units For example if the measured data from channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 02 is 20 V the computed result of 01 02 is 40 Order of precedence of the operators The order of precedence of the operators in the equation is as follows The operators are placed in order from the highest precedence Type Operator higher precedence Functions ABS SQR LOG EXP TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG P P TLOG SUM TLOG AVE Power xX Logical negation NOT Multiplication and division x Addition and subtraction Greater than less than GT ET GE LE Equal not equal EQ NE Logical AND AND Logical OR exclusive OR OR XOR lower precedence Displaying the computed result The computed data of computation channels can be displayed in each operation screen Displaying the waveform and bar graph The data are displayed in the range defined by the upper and lower limits of the span For the settings related to displaying the computed result see sections below Set computation channels See section 11 4 Assign channels to groups See section 7 6 Display tags See sect
18. 10 7 suonouny 194 0 2 10 6 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key BE r Key login Use Not Use Eee Auto logout off 1 9 UserID Use Not Use 3 Number 1 4 On Off On m5 User name luser1 a6 User ID E 7 Password g Enter setup Enable 9 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Note Use Not Set whether or not to use the key login function If Use is selected items 2 3 4 5 6 8 and 9 are displayed Use Use key login Not Do not use key login Auto logout Select On or Off On Automatically logs out if there is no key operation for ten minutes Off The user stays logged on until the user manually logs out User ID Use Not Set whether or not to use the user ID If Use is selected item 7 User ID appears Use Use the user
19. 85 The login password is incorrect See section 10 5 86 The key lock release password is incorrect See section 10 3 87 This key is locked See section 10 3 88 This function is locked See section 10 3 89 Press FUNC key to login See section 10 5 12 1 Bunooyseaqnos D 12 1 A List of Messages Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 90 No permission to enter to the SETUP mode See sections 10 5 and 10 6 91 Password is incorrect See sections 10 3 and 10 5 92 Press ESC key to change to the operation mode Press the ESC key 100 IP address doesn t belong to class A B or C See Communication Interface User s Manual 101 The result of the masked IP address is all Os or 1s See Communication Interface User s Manual 102 SUBNET mask is incorrect See Communication Interface User s Manual 103 The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP address See Communication Interface User s Manual 104 FTP client failed because the memory mode is manual See Communication Interface User s Manual e Execution Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 150 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress See sections 8 5 and 8 6 151 This action is not possible during sampling or calculating See sections 8 5 8 6 and 11 3 152 This action is not possible because saving is in progress Wait till
20. Disab Disab Disab Disab Disab Disab Disab Disab Disab Disab Media External storage medium During manual save During auto save Prevent saving when an external storage medium is inserted Prevent Zip disk removal Prevent Zip disk removal ed ed to change operation screens ed ed ed ed ed ed ed ed ed 1 Set together by Math parameter 2 Set together by Write memory parameter 10 5 suonouny 194 0 2 10 5 Using the Key Login Logout Function This function allows only certain users to access the RD MV200 The users are distinguished by their user IDs and passwords You can select whether or not to use User IDs In addition you can set whether or not to allow operations in the basic setting mode for each user When logged out only the login operation can be accessed Key login logout is set in the basic setting mode When logged in the user name is displayed in the status display section See section 4 2 The records of key login logout can be viewed on the log screen See section 10 7 Note _ When the power is turned OFF and turned ON again the RD MV200 starts in the logged out condition Logging in 1 Press the FUNC key Soft keys and a list of user names are displayed 2 Select the user using the soft key User1 User2 User3 3 When using the user ID a window appears for you to enter the user ID Enter the user ID and press the DISP ENTER
21. Do not store the measured computed data 11 19 uondo uonsuny Woday uonejndwog 11 9 Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode Explanation Setting the absolute timer 1 Mode Select Absolute Interval Reset Ref time and Action are displayed 5 Interval Set the time to the next timeout from 19 choices below 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h 6 Ref time Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time on the hour 00 to 23 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 7 Reset On Reset the TLOG value when the timer expires Off Do not reset the TLOG value when the timer expires 8 Action DataSave Store the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels to the internal memory when the time expires Off Do not store the measured computed data Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Acquiring the data of all channels to the internal memory at each interval setting at the Action box If Save data is specified in the Action box the
22. Minimum remaining amount of internal memory at which to generate the alarm 10 8 3 12 3 5 Configuring the Functions Settings related only to the computation channels configured on a screen dedicated to computation channels option Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Computation Computing equation specifications 11 4 Display span e Unit Constants 11 6 e Constants KO1 to K30 Alarm e Alarm type 11 5 e Alarm value 11 5 e Output relay On Off 11 5 e Output relay number 11 5 e Alarm delay time 6 3 Tag Channel display Tag name 7 1 Trend e Channel display color 7 8 e Number of display scale divisions 7 10 e Scale position 7 10 e Zone display 7 9 e Partial expanded display 7 11 e Computation channels to display the trend applies also to computation channels that data are to be acquired 8 10 Bar graph e Channel display color Applies also to trends 7 8 Number of scale divisions 7 10 e Bar graph base position 7 10 TLOG computation Timer number to use sum unit 11 8 e Timer mode absolute time relative time 11 9 Interval time 11 9 e Reference time for the absolute timer 11 9 Turn On Off reset at each interval 11 9 Turn On Off data saving to the storage medium 11 9 Rolling average 11 10 On Off e Sampling interval Number of samples Other settings Item Setting Mode Basic Setting
23. Note In order to switch from the 4 screen display to other screens select Expand first POWER al a Gmo Gran m Ca C C sro DISP ENTER four arrow keys 4 1 su 19 5 uopesado HulyIMS gt 4 2 Using the Status Display Section The following information is displayed in the status display section during the operation mode and the setting mode The information is not displayed in the basic setting mode Setup Mode is displayed instead 5 1 UOA O thour 2 16 8 9 10 UP 1 AL G os m ihour 1 16 5 LEM GRO Jan 01 2008 88 88 45 EVENT 6 6 1 Free mode Diw EAN 6 1 Tregger or Rotate mode To To E 1 User name The user name is displayed when a user is logged in using the login function 2 Group name or screen name The name of the group or screen that is displayed in the data display section ALL is displayed only during all channel display see section 4 3 3 Current date and time The current date and time are displayed 4 ON OFF state of the measured computed data acquisition A and B are displayed alternately Data acquisition in progress or waiting for the event data trigger C Data acquisition is suspended Note For event data that starts acquiring data upon receiving a trigger the indicator indicates that the data acqu
24. On Off On ot expression Equation for computation Span Lower Numerical value Span Upper Unit Character string Math alarm On Off On E Type H L T t Value Numerical value Relay On Off On Off Number 101 to 106 111 to 116 121 to 126 131 to 136 Up to model types Constant K01 to K30 Numerical value Initial setting is 1 Tag Tag Character string Initial setting is all space TLOG Timer No 2 3 Sum scale min h Rolling On Off On average Interval 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 10s 12s 15s 20s 30s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min th Number 1 to 64 Numerical value of samples Alarm delay time Numerical value xipueddy z App 3 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Basic setting mode Initial settings are thick framed Parameters Menu Notes Alarm Reflash On Off O Relay AND None fo 101 102 101 103 Up to model types 101 104 101 105 101 106 101 111 101 112 101 113 101 114 101 115 101 116 101 121 101 122 101 123 101 124 101 125 101 126 101 131 101 132 101 133 101 134 101 135 101 136 Action Energize De energ Behavior Indicator Rate of change Increase 3 4 Decrease
25. Power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 Warm up time At least 30 minutes Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation of the RD MV200 Measuring accuracy digital display Max resolution of digital display DC voltage 0 1 of rdg 2 digits TC Excluding the 0 15 of rdg 1 C However R S 3 7 C at 0 to 100 C 1 5 C at 100 to 300 C B 2 C at 400 to 600 C Accuracy at less than 400 C is not guaranteed reference junction compensation 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C However 0 15 of rdg 1 C at 200 to 100 C accuracy 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C 0 15 of rdg 1 C c r s z A c m x 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C me a o 0 15 of rdg 0 3 C 14 14 14 7 General Specifications Power Supply Measuring accuracy in case of scaling digits Accuracy during scaling digits measuring accuracy digits x multiplier 2 digits rounded up where the multiplier scaling span digits measuring span digits Example Assuming that e range 6V e measuring span 1 000 to 5 000 V scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Then Measuring accuracy 0 1 x 5 V 2 digits 0 005 V 5 dig
26. Returns the square root of the measured value of channel 1 Absolute value ABS ABS 01 Returns the absolute value of the measured value of channel 1 Logarithm LOG LOG 01 Returns the common logarithm of the measured value of channel 1 Exponent EXP EXP 01 Raises e to the power of the measured value of channel 1 Note The natural logarithm is not directly provided but can be obtained by using the following logpx logax logab or Inx logx loge Therefore to calculate the natural logarithm of the value of channel 01 set KO1 1 Then the expression will become LOG 01 LOG EXP K01 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations Relational Computation The types of data that can be used in equations are measurement channels computation channels constants KO1 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C30 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing element Example 01 LT ABS 02 EXAMPLE 02 LT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is less than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is greater than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 EQ 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is equal to the mea
27. The input falls below the alarm value at X4 and the alarm is released Difference upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Difference lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value 1 Can be specified only on difference computation channels Upper limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value Lower limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value 2 Can be specified only on measurement channels Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm pi R alarm Measured Z Measured value T2 value Variation T jen MeT 2 i i N sr alarm ti t2 Time gt t t2 Time gt Interval Interval te ti te ti The interval is defined by the following equation and is set in terms of the number of measured data points Interval Scan interval x number of measured data points 1 23 SUON OUNY JO MAIA
28. Up to 50 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data Note The number of manual sampled data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 TLOG data option TLOG data are acquired at each time interval set by timers Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data Note e Upto 16 TLOG files number of start and stop can be stored to the internal memory When the number of files in the internal memory exceeds 16 TLOG data are overwritten even if the number of data sets is less than 400 The number of TLOG data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary gt Section 4 5 Report data option Report data are acquired at each time interval one hour for hourly report one day for daily report etc Up to 40 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data For hourly only this constitutes 40 minutes of report data For daily monthly this constitutes 39 daily reports and one monthly report or 38 daily reports and two monthly reports Note The number of report data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 8 9 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljis
29. sm cm ME cE User s Gui Shop online at omega com CEOMEGA www omega com e mail info omega com ISO 9001 18509002 9002 CERTIFIED CORPORATE QUALITY CORPORATE QUALITY STAMFORD CT MANCHESTER UK D lt Gay gt 10 4 inch wide viewing angle color LCD display Digital display area o RD MV200 status display area The display updating interval is 1 second Trend display area Power ON OFF switch The fastest trend display updating rate is 1 min div approximately 615 Removable storage drive RD MV200 SERIES Recorder omega com CEOMEGA OMEGAnet Online Service Internet e mail www omega com info omega com USA ISO 9001 Certified Canada Servicing North America One Omega Drive P O Box 4047 Stamford CT 06907 0047 TEL 203 359 1660 FAX 203 359 7700 e mail info omega com 976 Bergar Laval Quebec H7L 5A1 TEL 514 856 6928 FAX 514 856 6886 e mail info omega ca For immediate technical or application assistance USA and Canada Mexico Benelux Czech Republic France Germany Austria United Kingdom ISO 9002 Certified Sales Service 1 800 826 6342 1 800 TC OMEGA Customer Service 1 800 622 2378 1 800 622 BEST Engineering Service 1 800 872 9436 1 800 USA WHEN TELEX 996404 EASYLINK 62968934 CABLE OMEGA En Espa ol 001 203 359 7803 e mail espano
30. 0 315 6 235000E 00 CHIE Ki 0 315 8 312 0 319 6 304000E 00 CHI v 8 322 8 318 0 326 6 447000E 00 CHI8 v 8 328 0 325 0 332 6 568000E 00 CHIS v 8 333 8 330 8 337 6 669000E 00 CH20 v 8 341 8 338 8 344 6 821600E 00 CH21 v 8 325 8 322 0 329 6 505000E 00 CH22 v 8 332 8 329 8 336 6 645000E 08 CH23 v 8 339 8 336 0 343 6 771000E 00 CH24 v 8 347 8 344 0 351 6 932000E 00 CH25 Ki 0 351 0 349 0 356 7 025000E 00 CH26 v 0 355 0 352 0 359 7 097000E 00 CH2 v 0 362 2 59 0 366 7 232000E 00 CH28 v 8 368 8 365 8 372 7 351000E 00 CH29 v Esa 8 372 8 370 8 377 7 448000E 00 CH38 v 8 379 8 376 8 384 7 588000E 00 j Status of data see section 11 11 1 14 1 3 Display Function 4 Screen Display Up to four different display formats can be displayed at once The following formats can be displayed Trend display digital display bar graph display overview alarm summary message summary and memory summary The data of different groups can be displayed in quadrants that are showing the trend display digital display or bar graph The display condition of the 4 screen display can be registered up to four configurations The registered configuration can be recalled to the screen The initial setting is as follows Display Name Displays Shown MIX Trend group 1 digital group 1 bar graph group 1 and overview ALL TREND All trend displays groups 1 through 4 ALL DIGITAL Al
31. 2 971 bytes e Size of the data section of one data set The following equation can be used to derive the size of data section of one data set Date and time of manual sampling measured value 8 x number of measurement channel computed value 10 x number of computation channels carriage return line feed e The size of the date and time of creation is fixed to 19 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Manual sampled data for 30 measurement channels 19 8 x 30 10 x 0 2 261 bytes xipueddy z App 7 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Number of data sets and file size The file size of 50 data sets for 30 measurement channels is calculated as follows Size of the header section 50 x size of the data section of one data set 14019 bytes 50 data sets is the maximum number of manual sampled data sets that can be written in the internal memory If there are more than 50 data sets they are overwritten starting with the oldest data set Note Positive negative over range in measurement channels Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over r
32. Data type Select E D 8 24 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Explanation Boxes used to set the method for event data acquisition are displayed The procedures used to set each parameter are the same as those described for Acquiring only the event data In step 4 Free is not selectable Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Choices for the data length The maximum value of the data length varies depending on the sampling interval It is also dependent on the type of data to be acquired display data and event data or event data only and the number of measurement and computation channels to be acquired See section 8 10 The available choices for the data length are displayed on the soft key menu See the table below Sample 0 125 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 rate s Data length 3min 3min 3min 3min 3min choices 5min 5min 5min 5min 5min 10min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 1h 1h th 1h 1h th th 1h th th 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h
33. Mem Math and press DISP ENTER to stop the computation At this point the data acquisition to the internal memory is also stopped The computation icon in the status display section also disappears Operation using the FUNC key 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu When the computation is suspended the Math START soft key is displayed If the computation is in progress the Math STOP soft key is displayed e Starting the computation 2 Press the Math START key to start the computation When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 Stopping the computation 2 Press the Math STOP key to stop the computation The computation icon in the status display section also disappears EX 11 3 Using the Computation Function Operation using the USER key Starting the computation 1 Press the USER key to start the computation When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 Stopping the computation 1 Press the USER key to stop the computation The computation icon in the status display section also disappears Note When the computation is stopped the computed data of the computation channel is held at the value that existed immediately before If data are being written
34. Setup data are saved to the root directory Saved data during manual save When using manual save you can select whether to save all the data residing in the internal memory or only the data that have not previously been saved to the storage medium e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 File Header ee Directory name Daraa 2 Save data Unsave 3 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Header Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the header up to 32 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 2 Directory name Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the directory up to 8 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures
35. amp Dissolved Oxygen Instruments M3642 1200
36. cece 11 3 over range measurement 1 3 11 25 OVEMIOW diiirn see L158 OVEPVICW SCIOGI cers ccescccssccasecesccanscestscsnentraecenenenstesncensscanees 1 10 P PANG CUTOUT riasg eea aE partial expanded display password key l00K ucisi a password key login s ssssssssssnssssnsnsisssnnsnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ne periodic maintenance a physical toM atesa oui niaiem airs PNOY orinn a e E NE altace ME power computation power switch jolar leke e1 ccf E AE A E TERS QUICK asearen aeea raa EE EE iE 9 11 R Fl E E A EE E E ein alee 6 7 range computation channel range scaling e rear PANG essiri ar aiae aa Re Ea paai 3 3 reducing the TIME AXIS sects vcccscise cect wens waeeeesetneecceces 4 22 reference channel reference junction COMpensation eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 3 WON AS a E E A E E relational computation sa rel tive Mode airsean e ia aeaa atia AESA releasing the Alarm e is c lt ccccinseccccccnveseetesecsesseaverstecesveveccteae releasing the alarm remote control remote Control TUNCHION sieisen aeina EMOS SIQMA sesiis aieiaa iaai iiaia removing Zip disk cceeee replacement periods for worn parts replacing the fuse eee PO POM Cat E E eveens utedeaeedeasiesictdaseese r port data display sccen lt sccssnsecseccenveccceceniesceesenscvsee aaeveceues report date eae report day of thle Week nessieira report fil data format
37. different the measured value is not adjusted Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 V and the measured value of the reference channel is 5 00 mV the computation result becomes 10 00 V 5 00 mV 5 00 V e When the reference channel is set to Scale or Sqrt the computation uses the scaled values 5 8 5 5 Scaling Setting Procedure For DC voltage thermocouple RTD and digital input the measured values can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed Set the upper and lower limits of the input s display span the upper and lower limits after scaling and the unit The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa l 1 5 First CH Last CH Jor Range Span Hode Type Range Lower Upper Volt H 2 008 2 008 Scale Lover Upper Unit 0 00 200 88 i 2 3 4 6 7 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to
38. hour Report CH On Off Channel Sum scale NOOR WON The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Report set Hour Creates hourly reports Day Creates daily reports Day Week Creates daily and weekly reports Day Month Creates daily and monthly reports 2 Date Day of the week This is the date or day of the week on which the report is created If the Report set is set to Day Month Date is displayed If Day Week is specified Day is displayed If Hour or Day is specified Date is displayed However this setting is void e Date for monthly reports Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the date Enter the date 01 28 and press the DISP ENTER key Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 e Day for weekly reports Enter the day of the week using the soft key 11 27 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 13 Setting the Report Function Explanation 3 Time hour Set the time to create daily weekly and monthly reports with the time on the hour 00 to 23 Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values s
39. when the scale display is turned On see section 4 3 on the trend display Select the position from 1 to 10 Select Off for channels without scale Note ____ The scale for the channels that are assigned to the group in the trend display are displayed The larger the number of scales to be displayed less amount of area there is to display the waveform Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 16 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Explanation Scale Specifications Scale display position On the trend display the scale display position for the channels that are assigned to groups can be displayed in 10 different positions see the figure below During trend horizontal display The scale display position is 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 and 1 from the left Imin div moo 100 foo Moo Moo Aod Aod Moo 100 foo E E p ES E 90 F 88 35 EME EEE FP BE E PEE mE EE F mH EREEPREE gt BEE EE BEE BEEM EF EE mb E M E E Wnr 50 Wnt unt 50 unit unit 50 E WNIT UNITE E UNIT E NT UNIT E E M 42 E 40 5 2 MO 5 EF 40 E E amp E E FE E EB FE E EE EF 8 E E E E E 5 28 25 MER Me PEEE mE _ E ey aa m PEEEE amp MEE a ae
40. x sccscccc cisecsdsieesiesetesalcceseneerees report function PE POM IMG ssccccccccsve cites ctccccasesveccte ssid cine snd kairani ndia taK toset TOG umeongea esaea aN AEE resistance temperature detector wee MSING PAllING COGS saninin renas ieaiaia ieia RIG E E st E T E T su aces hie eas rolling average rotate rules for writing an equation common items 11 7 FUN MODE wieasececccnssvcnceusapencestanyeracevantececsianeccedsawencecenaseescanaye 3 7 S Safety Standard Ssa e eee sample Tate asrine naipe aaaea E aE ANE ATTA sampling interval display data sampling interval event data cece eeeeeeereeee Sampling length crea ei aea enri saved data manual save saving data to the external storage media i saving data using key operation 9 5 saving data via Ethernet 00 saving setup data basic setting mode saving setup data setting mode 00 9 1 saving the data using key operation auto save 8 17 scale bat graph vesist e 1 10 scale trend Te scale display position 2 0 2 eee eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 17 SCAG MARKS ais focecsiesets eSa ATA E hanes scale specifications scale yale Sinana ath atvasteesaessenattiaees SCAN ia aee TEE ETER EEA EEE EEEE SCAN interval oinin screen assignment 4 screen display sereen MENU aieiaiei aen a sequence number 8 2 8 16 9 5 9 1
41. 2u Shou 2 16 0 Stop data acquisition 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition and all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel A _Yes i 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Note e One file is created for one set of start and stop operations The maximum number of files that can be stored in the internal memory is 16 When the memory area becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 existing data will be overwritten starting with the oldest data When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When the power resumes data are written to a new file e Data acquisition can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands e The START STOP operation also starts stops the report function e When the computation is stopped it is started with the START key wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xyq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 6 Acquiring Event Data During Trigger mode or Rotate mode Start data acquisition 1 Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state The icon in the status display section will change accordingly A
42. 390 Command error 391 Delimiter error 392 Parameter error 393 No permission 394 No such connection 395 Use quit to close this connection 396 Failed to disconnect 397 No TCP control block Other Communication Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 400 Input username 401 Input password 402 Select username from admin or user 403 Login incorrect try again 404 No more login at the specified level is acceptable 410 Login successful The special user level 411 Login successful The general user level 420 Connection has been lost 421 The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded 422 Communication has timed out Note For information regarding the communication function of the RD MV200 see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 12 6 12 1 A List of Messages Status Messages Code Message 500 Execution is complete 501 Please wait a moment 503 Data are being saved to media 504 File is being loaded from media 505 Formatting 506 Memory save to media was interrupted 507 Exchange media to continue the saving operation 510 Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 511 MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling
43. 5 From Load display data See section 9 3 From Load event data See section 9 4 Recall from the screen menu Described in this section Displaying the historical trend screen from the screen menu Of the data being sampled the display data existing before the execution of this operation are displayed as a historical trend 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 2 Select TREND HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Note Even if the display data are not configured to be acquired to the internal memory see section 8 11 the display data existing before the execution of this operation are displayed as a historical trend 4 20 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Group display or all channel display is shown in the channel display color The background color is the opposite of the trend display black or white Messages and trip lines are also displayed Expanding Reducing rate Time axis Tag Channel Maximum and minimum values at the display reference position Maximum and minimum values among the data displayed TAG 81 0 551 2 000 8 584 2 000 Ci Unit E a 0 034 2 000 8 069 2 000 L H TAG 83 2 0 483 2 000 6 449 2 000 O cn z TAG B4 g S ia 9 i ny oO TAG 85 Icons for S 1389 2 screen switching o 1 363 2 000 A pH The ico
44. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Hysterisis On Jof A D Integrate Auto 50Hz 60 Hz 100 ms 100 ms is for RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Scaninterval 125ms 250 ms RD MV204 RD MV208 lis 2s RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Burnout set Off up Down RJC internal External Volt uV Numerical value Memory Save Auto Manual Data E D Event Event Sample 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 125 ms 250 ms and 500 ms are rate 2s 5s 10s 30s for MV204 and MV208 only 60s 120s Mode Free Trigger Rotate Block 1 2 4 8 1 2 and 4 when Data is set to 16 E D Data length 3 min to 31 days Up to other parameters set Pre trigger 0 5 25 50 75 95 100 Trigger Key On Off External On Off Alarm On Off Memory and Meas CH Math CH Math CH trend First CH Up to model types Last CH On Off AUX Tag Channel Memory alarm 5h 10h 100h Language German French Partial Batch for models with BT1 App 4 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Keylock Use Not Use password Character string START Free Lock STOP Free Lock MENU Free Lock USER Free Lock DISP ENTER Free Lock Alarm ACK Free Lock Math Free Lock Vata Free Lock Media Free Lock Key login Use Not Use Auto logout On Off User ID Use Not Use Not Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 On Off On Off User name User 1
45. 50 60 Hz automatic switching for AC Rated Power consumption 80 VA for AC power supply model 42 VA for 12 VDC power supply model suonesiioeds fa 14 15 14 7 General Specifications Power consumption Supply voltage Backlight saving mode Normal Max 100 VAC 30 VA 35 VA 55 VA 240 VAC 50 VA 55 VA 80 VA 12 VDC 19 VA 21 VA 42 VA Normal Operating Conditions Power supply voltage Power supply frequency Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Vibration Shock Magnetic field Noise 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC 10 to 18 VDC for 12 VDC power supply model 50 Hz 2 60 Hz 2 0 to 50 C when using FDD or Zip drive 5 to 40 C 20 to 80 RH at 5 to 40 C 10 to 60 Hz 0 2 m s or less Not acceptable 400 A m or less DC and 50 60 Hz Normal mode 50 60 Hz Volt The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring range TC The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring thermal electromotive force RTD 50 mV or less Common mode noise 50 60 Hz 250 Vrms AC or less for all ranges Maximum noise voltage between channels 50 60 Hz Mounting position Warm up time Altitude Effects of Operating Conditions Ambient temperature Power supply Magnetic field 250 Vrms AC or less Can be inclined up to 30 deg backward Mounting at an angle away from the perpendicular is not acceptable At least 30
46. A1423EF 1 250 V 4A time lag when the suffix code for power supply is 1 A1354EF 1 250 V 6 3 A time lag when the suffix code for power supply is 2 9 User s Manual M3642 1 This manual 10 User s Manual M3643 1 Communication function 11 User s Manual M3644 1 DAQstandard software Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Sold Separately The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately If you make an order make sure that all items are present and undamaged For information about ordering accessories contact the dealer from which you purchased the RD MV200 Number Part Name Part Number Model Qty Notes 1 3 5 floppy disk 7059 00 10 2HD 2 Zip disk A1053MP 1 100 MB 3 ATA flash memory card A1134UN 1 20 MB 4 Shunt resistor 4159 20 1 250 Q 0 1 for the screw terminal 4159 21 1 100 Q 0 1 4159 22 1 10 Q 0 1 5 Shunt resistor 4389 20 1 250 Q 0 1 for the clamped 4389 21 1 100 Q 0 1 input terminal 4389 22 1 10 Q 40 1 6 Fuse A1423EF 4 250 V 1 25 A time lag for AC power supply model A1354EF 4 250 V 6 3 A time lag for 12 VDC power supply model 7 Cover 790511 il Software Sold Separately The following software application is available Name Model Required O S Notes DAQEXPLORER RD DXA200 02 Windows 95 98 Windows NT4 0 Provided on two 3 5 floppy disks vi How to Use this Manual Structure of th
47. Alarm mark OE _z eo 0 360 Pointer HIH V Indicates the current value of each 3 E S channel All pointers for channels 2 9 E 0 360 that are not displaying the scale are 1 2 LIIL y displayed at the right most scale g position E 0 361 o 1 8 2 0 Y Trip line Scale L Numerical display section Message Can be setto Can be turned ON OFF Can be entered an arbitrary position using key operation Trend Vertical Display Pointer Indicates the current value of each channel All pointers for channels that are not displaying the scale are displayed at the top scale position 2 0 By g EN a 1 2 2 0 Crit NW TV Tsk TT ae Ya il TA al eT WN PS bn AAR nna rbon AB tal tds Seale 1 6 A 0 9 z 0 3 v 0 3 0 9 1 6 Pfu A r E uulan a OTD OT UMM AVeU TOON OOT na Inin div Trip line Message Unit 0 644 v Tag Channel no Alarm mark Measured computed value The display direction of the trend and the bar graph For the setting procedure of the display direction of the trend and the bar graph see section 7 13 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Digital Tag Channel no TAG 01 Measured computed value Alarm mark TAG 02 TAG 03 1 67 1 338 L H 0 907 TAG 84 0 415 mY Unit TAG 05 TAG 06 0 104
48. Cont Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 For TC or RTD input the display span cannot exceed the difference between the maximum and the minimum of the input range Example For TC type L the input range is 200 0 to 900 0 C The maximum display span is 1100 0 C For DC voltage input the display span cannot exceed the input range The upper limit and the lower limit cannot be set to the same value 5 7 sBuinjes jeuueyo juoweinseoyy 7 5 4 Difference Computation Delta Setting Explanation 6 Ref CH Set the reference channel see Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Measurable range The following table shows the mode type range and measurable range Mode Type Range Measurable Range Delta Volt 20 mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 00 to
49. DDS 2000781784 02 21 paras 10402210 DDS 2008781 7a4 82 25 Ras 10402250 DDS 2000 01 04 02 28 File nane Batch name No 10461538 DDS 10402000 DDS 18482858 DDS 4aanooan NNC SAMPLE 818 SAMPLE 811 SAMPLE 812 CAMDI C ANIC 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the Directory name column Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory containing the display data to be loaded A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column Root directory is denoted by 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or arrow key to select the display data file to be loaded To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the waveform on the historical trend screen To return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen without displaying the historical trend press the ESC key 9 6 9 4 Viewing Event Data in the External Storage Medium Procedure Loads the event data saved in the external storage medium and displays the waveform on the historical trend screen This operation can be carried out when the acquisition of event data is set Event or E D in section 8 11 See section 4 6 for the use of the historical trend These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate positi
50. Format type Floppy disk 2 HD 1 44 MB Zip disk FDISK 1 partition hard disk format ATA flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format External storage media formatted on other devices can be used as long as the format type is the same as those indicated above 3 6 3 4 Run Mode There are three run modes on the RD MV200 operation setting and basic setting This section describes the functions and relationships of the three modes Mode Types Power ON Operation mode Operation screens lt END soft key DISP ENTER MENU MENU or ESC Setting mode Basic setting mode Menu screen Pressing FUNC for 3 seconds Menu screen ESC Soft key MENU or Soft key ESC Setting screens Setting screens Mode Type Description Possible Operations Operation mode This mode is used for daily operation This mode is entered when the power is turned ON Monitoring operation Data acquisition Setting mode the file on Setting the operation Operation related to This mode is used to configure the RD MV200 operation such as input range and alarms This mode is entered by pressing the MENU key in the operation mode Measured data cannot be displayed in this mode Operations such as measurements alarm detection and data a
51. Jan 81 2088 82 37 58 Jan 1 2000 62 38 18 Cursor m TAG a3 21 Jan 01 2088 82 37 19 Jan 1 2808 62 37 39 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 36 48 Jan 1 2808 62 37 88 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 36 17 Jan 1 2000 62 36 37 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 02 35 46 Jan 81 2000 62 36 06 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 02 35 15 Jan 81 2000 62 35 35 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 02 34 44 Jan 81 2000 62 35 04 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 34 13 Jan 81 2000 62 34 33 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 33 42 Jan 1 2008 62 34 82 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 33 11 Jan 81 2088 62 33 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 32 48 Jan 1 2008 02 33 00 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 32 89 Jan 1 2088 82 32 29 TAG 03 21 Jan 81 2088 82 31 38 Jan 01 2808 82 31 58 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 82 31 87 Jan 81 2000 62 31 27 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 30 36 Jan 81 2000 62 38 56 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 02 30 05 Jan 81 2000 62 30 25 TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2000 02 29 34 Jan 81 2000 62 29 54 Mark see section 6 1 Y The historical trend of the data containing the selected ijeki 23 26 1 714 1 63 8 551 2 000 i584 2 000 C TAG 82 8 034 2 080 8 069 2 000 L H TAG 83 8 483 2 088 6 449 2 000 cn TAG B4 8 969 2 088 6 938 2 000 us ny TAG B5 1 389 2 088 1 363 2 088 pH 2 000 2 000 y 1 11 suonoun4 JO M AIIAO 7 1 3 Display Function Message Summary The messages that were entered in the trend display and the times when they were entered message information are displ
52. Option A WARNING To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF Ifa voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the FAIL Memory End output terminal use ring tongue crimp on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose Furthermore use double insulated wires dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied For all other wires use basic insulated wires dielectric strength of 1350 VAC To prevent electric shock attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals OOZAIN GH 34 Bursn 21049 e Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the RD MV200 and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the FAIL Memory End output wires to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the FAIL Memory End output option is as follows Terminal Position Option Terminal 1 F1 Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the FAIL Memory End output terminals is indicated When the relay is not energized NC is closed and NO is open C is the common terminal FAIL MEMORY 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note The option terminal block itself can be removed by loosening the two screws at the top left and bottom right of the terminal
53. Overview Screen Operation Flow Diagram Screen menu Overview screen Screen menu Sub menu A A A VE gt v v To TREND Channel To BAR GRAPH selection Cursor ON OFF Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 44 gt Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select Overview using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Displaying or clearing the cursor 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select CURSOR ON or CURSOR OFF The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu B OVERVIEW CURSOR ON PE OVERVIEW CURSOR OFF 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays or clears the cursor To close the menu without displaying clearing the cursor press the ESC key Switching to the trend or bar graph screen of the channel selected with the cursor 1 Move the cursor to select the channel using the arrow key 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select JUMP TO TREND or JUMP TO BAR usi
54. Selecting Tag Display or Channel Number Display Basic Setting Mode 7 2 Setting the Display Update Rate Trend r Using Message Stings Mend sieriem E NN aN Setting the Message String Treng issostni Seile GrOUPS EAE E dnttecierecdasaesserserdinainecsiscecsctssetans Setting the Trip Line Trend 2 0 eeseesceeeseeseceteseeeseeeeaeeseaeesaeeeaeecaeeeseeseaeeesaseeseeteaeens Setting the Channel Display Colors Trend Bar Graph Using Zone Displays Trend siae a a idad aaraa Eaa SAES EEEN i Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend pissisten eaire 7 15 Using Partial Expanded Display Trend cccscsssseesceesessneesesasseseessasseansessasasesaes 7 20 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Partial Expanded Display Basic Setting Mode 7 22 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid ANd Scroll time 0 0 eee eee eeeeeseeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeseeeeaseraees 7 23 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function ceeeee 7 25 Assigning a Name to the 4 Screen Display 00 0 0 cece cece eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeie 7 26 Data Acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved cccc cece senescence seeeseessaaseeseeasenseneeeeaeae 8 1 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Datt
55. This is a value within the display span By moving the value within the display span to another position see step 3 the area on either side of the boundary is expanded or compressed Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter the boundary and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 The range for the boundary The minimum value of the span 1 digit to the maximum value of the span 1 digit when the range is not set to scaling The minimum value of the scale 1 digit to the maximum value of the scale 1 digit when the range is set to scaling Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note The partial expanded display is turned OFF for all channels if the partial expanded display setting use not use in the basic setting mode is changed and stored e When the range setting of the channel is set to Skip or when the span width is less than or equal to 1 digit the partial expanded display cannot be specified The box is grayed in this case 7 21 Aejdsiq oy Buneiado pue Huas 7 12 Setting Whether or Not to Use the Partial Expanded Display B
56. This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft keys 2 Press the Message soft key Eight soft keys for the messages and a window containing a list of messages are displayed 7 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to display A message mark time and the message are displayed on the trend display Hessage list Hessagel Hessage2 Message Hessaged Hessage5 Hessage6 Hessage Hessage8 Nessagel Message2 Nessage3 Messaged Message5 Nessage6 Next 1 2 Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out when one of Message1 to Message8 is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the USER key to display a message on the trend display and write a message to the internal memory Note _____ Messages can be displayed on the trend display and written into the internal memory along with the display data file and the event data file while data acquisition is in progress 7 4 This page intentionally left blank Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 5 7 4 Using Message Strings Trend The messages can also be displayed and written to the internal memory via remote control option or communications Explanation Message Display J f jil la f j 80 19 MH ja 80 13 MESSAGE j Message mark Message entering time Message Displayed colors of the message marks Th
57. When computation data are acquired to the internal memory the data immediately before a computation drop out are substituted for the computation data at the time of the drop out 11 9 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 4 Setting Computation Channels This section describes the procedures to set equations to computation channels The equation is set in the setting mode Equations cannot be set while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mw Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key a7 1 First CH 31 Last CH 31 Nath range Nath On Off Span Calculation expressi Lower Upper Unit al 20 00 200 00 2 3 4 5 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Math On Off If On is selected a box used to enter the equation will appear When not using computation select Off 3 Calculation expression Enter
58. all space Moving average Count 2 3 4 RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Filter 10s RD MV204 RD MV208 Alarm delay time 1 to 3600 s Numerical value Trend Save Time div 15s 15 s and 30 s are for RD MV204 and interval 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min RD MV208 only th 2h 4h Aute save interval 10 min to 31 days al Up to other parameters set Message Characters No 1 to No 8 Character string Initial setting is all space File Header Character string Initial setting is all space Directory name Character string Initial setting is DATA 0 Save data Unsave xipueddy z Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes User key Action None Trigger Math Math rst M sample Messsage 1 Message 2 Message 3 Message4 Message5 Message 6 Message 7 Message 8 Snapshot Group set Group number 1 2 3 4 Fixed Group name GROUP3 Character string CH set See section 7 6 for initial settings Trip line On Off On Position Numerical value Color Red Green Blue B violet Initial values are No 1 Red Brown Orange Y green Lightblue RE SA No 3 Blue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Color CH1 to CH30
59. along the time axis is derived from the following equation given the dot pitch of the LCD 0 33 mm The speed of movement of the trend display along the time axis 30 dots x 0 33 mm x 60 min display update rate min Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 is 2 s the display update rate is also 25 1 3 Display Function Displayed Data The data displayed on the screen are a maximum and minimum values of the data that are sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot Displayed data of the waveform when the display update rate is set to one minute Maximum value ae Minimum value 7 2 s 1 dot When the display update rate is set to one Tain minute the time period corresponding to 1 division 30 dots a sampling interval of displayed The time period corresponding to one dot is called the sampling interval of displayed data The sampling interval of displayed data is determined by the display update rate The relationship between the display update rate and the sampling interval of displayed data is as follows Display Update 15 s 30 s 1 min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h Rate div Sampling interval of 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 displayed data s for RD MV204 and RD MV208 only For the procedure related to setti
60. and press the DISP ENTER key 7 7 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 6 Setting Groups Procedure Trend digital and bar graph displays are displayed in groups Channels can be assigned to each group and the group name can be registered e Number of groups 4 e Number of channels Up to 10 channels group As for setting the channels to display the trend see section 8 10 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key Oo To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa l Group number il 1 Group set Group name GROUP 1 _ _ 2 CH Set 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 18 1 3 Trip line The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Group number Select the group number 1 to 4 2 Group name Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the group name Enter the group name up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering charac
61. appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key Oo l 1 First CH Last CH jar jar Range Mode 2 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Skip Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 5 13 sBuinjes jeuueyo jueweinseoyy 7 5 8 Input Filter and Moving Average Setting Procedure Explanation Set the input filter for RD MV204 RD MV208 low pass filters or the moving average of the input for RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are c
62. at certain time intervals to a storage medium that has been inserted into the drive beforehand referred to as auto save Other types of data that can be stored In addition to the types of data described in Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory the following types of data can be stored on the external storage medium Setting data The RD MV200 setting data such as the setting of the functions of the input section as described in section 1 2 can also be stored to an external storage medium to the specified file name The stored data can also be loaded and used by the RD MV200 Image data of the display screen The image data of the display screen can be stored to the external storage medium The image data can be pasted to documents created on a PC Saving Data via Ethernet The display data event data and report data as described in Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory can be automatically transferred to an FTP server via Ethernet for storage Conversely the RD MV200 can operate as an FTP server The RD MV200 can be accessed from a PC and the data in the external storage medium can be retrieved for storage For these functions see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 1 21 1 5 Alarm Function This function generates an alarm when the measured computed data meets a certain condition When an alarm occurs information notifying the alarm occurrence is displayed on the screen In ad
63. characters that can be displayed is up to 4 The unit is not displayed if the resolution of the measuring by small marks range is less than the number of scale divisions set for example when the measuring range is 0 0 to 0 1 V on the 20 V range and the number of scale division is set to 12 g 8 8 8 Bar base position normal right edge Bar base position normal left edge 3 S 8 1 000 1 400 Bar base position center 1 400 s 3 3 3 8 8 8 1 408 7 19 Aejdsig oy Buneiado pue Huas 7 11 Using Partial Expanded Display Trend Procedure By compressing a section of the display scale of the measured computed data the remaining section of the display is expanded For detail see section 1 3 To use the partial expanded display first set the partial expanded display to Use in the basic setting mode This will display a partial expanded display setting box in the setting mode see section 7 12 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to whit
64. data acquisition remote control 10 14 Statistical computation eee ee eee eee eee eeeeeenetenenes 11 1 status report 11 24 status display section 1 5 4 2 status messages aa heed STOP key 3 1 storage function storage medium drive 2 style MUMBO issena nea aE aoea aai i SUBMENU aseeni niaaa aiid aari eaii sum scale report sum scale TLOG SUMIMON WINTCR 52 cscs aveecsteas cease pateecetvazeaviesstensteecrtassiceceetys SUPEIVISOF NAM Gece uccccecasncdscessenccedetvecneadisvanscudesiasdtaaiaste 1 27 system errors system screen T CMs aaa saceta isteach E A fee etioes sh E T Up Seaduas EPT E EE dats thas hdddaitivs ddd seus uhtareuwua tease shied tag display sare WG E E E cedar EE eer iee aes astaretigs temperature Uni sinnir a 1 33 thermocouple ee UMER cassie diecast esas r E TOG COMPUTATION a wssececsscevces eens deve evecare 11 16 TLOG data 1 21 8 1 trend screen 1 6 trigger 8 4 trigger remote signal 1 32 trip lihen TA trOUBIESHOOLING aisaen aN 12 8 U unit COMPUTATION sna tiaa 11 11 unit scale unit scaling unit square root computation eee eee eeeeeeeees 5 12 unit handling Fe Updating bar Graph ccccssvecccectsesccesistesecesvseesscetvenesstecvaevers 1 10 UPOATIMNG GIGItAl sesiecccccsvsengucessceuceesieecunesnseccstecaecssaevetenedets 1 9 updating overview 1 1
65. instantaneous values of not only the channels set to compute the TLOG computation but also those of every channel can be acquired to the internal memory at the specified interval whether or not any channel is set to compute the TLOG computation has no relevance The data along with the TLOG data are written to the area for writing the TLOG computed data of the internal memory When storing to the external storage medium the data are stored to the TLOG data file DTG extension For details related to the data acquisition of data to the internal memory and the storage to the external storage medium see the explanation on the TLOG data in chapter 8 Note TLOG data are written to the internal memory at the interval determined by the timer when the timer is specified see section 11 8 writing to the internal memory is carried out regardless of the setting specified in the above mentioned Action box 11 20 11 10 Using the Rolling Average Procedure A rolling average can be specified as the moving average on the computed results of each computation channel Set the sampling interval and the number of samples The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The rolling average can be used to suppress fluctuations in the computed results These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot
66. instruments that produce electromagnetic fields close to the RD MV200 Operating the RD MV200 in strong magnetic fields can cause errors in the measurements Bad angle for viewing the screen Because the RD MV200 uses a 10 4 TFT color LCD it is difficult to view the display from an extreme angle Please install the RD MV200 so that the monitor can be viewed from the front 2 2 2 3 Input Signal Wiring A CAUTION If a strong tension is applied to the cable wired to the RD MV200 the terminals of the RD MV200 and or the cable can be damaged Allow extra wire for the input signal wire so that direct tension is not applied to the input terminals of the recorder Precautions to be taken while wiring Take the following precautions when wiring the input signal cables It is recommended that crimp on lugs designed for 4 mm screws with insulation sleeves be used on the lead wire ends However this does not apply to the clamped terminals the suffix code for input terminal is 1 f i Crimp on lug Take measures to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit Move the measurement circuit away from the power cable power circuit and ground cable It is desirable that the item being measured does not generate noise However if this is unavoidable isolate the measurement circuit from the item Also ground the item being measured Shielded wires should be used to minimize noise caused by el
67. integration frequency See section 5 9 Use the input filter See section 5 8 Use the cover for the input terminal Protect the input terminal from wind or fans Keep the room temperature constant around the input terminal Wire correctly See section 2 3 Fix the terminal block properly Fasten the terminal screws Insulate the RTD from ground If burnt replace the TC Stop the TC burnout upscale downscale function of other equipment Ground the RD MV200 and other equipment at the same grounding pole Disconnect parallel wiring Use a double element TC for instance Set correctly See section 5 9 12 9 Bunooyseaqnouy D 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Display and other functions do not work properly Separate the input and communication wiring from the noise source Ground the RD MV200 properly Use shielded cables for input and communication wiring Insert an isolation transformer into the power line Insert a power line filter into the power line If an inductive load is connected to an alarm contact output use a surge suppresser on that line Is the input free of noise Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center 12 10 Chapter 13 Maintenance 13 1 Periodic Maintenance Check the operation periodically to keep the RD MV200 in good working order Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed e
68. is selectable from 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min Number of indication channels Measured values and alarm status of all channels Alarm summary Displays the list of alarms Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Message summary Display the list of messages and time Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Memory summary Display the file list in internal memory Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Number of characters 16 characters maximum Display the retrieved data from internal or external memory Display format Whole screen display or divided into 2 areas only when displaying the historical trend of the display data Time axis operation Can be expanded reduced and scrolled Memory information The following information of the retrieved data are displayed File name serial number of the RD MV which is used to acquire data starting and ending time of data acquisition user name when using key login function and batch information models with BT1 Display the logs of error messages key login logout communication interface commands and file transfers via FTP Display the number of input points capacity of the internal memory options MAC address and firmware version number The LCD backlight automatically dims if no key is pressed for a certain preset time can be set from 1 2 5 10 20 and 60 minutes Selectable from English German
69. is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select SCALE ON or SCALE OFF The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu TREND gt TA tte Lo ul SCALE ON TL 7 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the scale To close the menu without displaying clearing the scale press the ESC key Displaying all channel trend return to group channel trend This operation is carried out on the Trend screen Group channel trend displays waveforms of the channels assigned to the group see section 7 6 All channel trend displays waveforms of all channels set for Trend screen See section 8 10 to set channels for Trend screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Trend is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select ALL CHANNEL or GROUP CHANNEL using the up and down arrow keys The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu Ww TREND gt TE tLe ce D ALL CHANNEL J zre TT 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Trend Horizontal Display All Channel Display Waveforms for all channels that are registered to display the trend are displayed
70. is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key 7 1 Se First CH 31 Last CH EE Nath range Hath On Off On Span Calculation expression Lower Upper Unit al 200 008 200 08 Hath alarm Rela Type Value On OFt Number H 0 60 On fio mone ojojo N 44 4 gt 4 SS The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Math range is also simultaneously set 2 On Off Turn the alarm On enabled Items 3 4 and 5 are displayed On Use alarm Off Do not use alarm 11 13 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 5 Setting the Alarm 3 Type Set the alarm type H Upper limit alarm L Lower limit alarm T Delay upper limit alarm t Delay lower limit alarm
71. key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key The extension PNL will automatically be added to the file name The following character combinations cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for file names 2 Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are also not allowed Press the DISP ENTER key to save the data The saved file appears in the file list If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium a message will appear to confirm overwriting Select Yes or No and press the DISP ENTER key 9 1 eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue sayi4 GBuibeuey fa 9 1 Saving loading setup data Loading setup data in the setting mode Procedure Loads the setup data set in the setting mode only from a setup file in the external storage medium and make the settings effective Setting items that are inconsistent with the content of the basic setting mode of the RD MV200 will not be acquired Returns to the operation mode when loading is completed e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press 6 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen
72. logout the newest 50 e A record of communication commands the newest 200 A record of file transfers made using the FTP client function the newest 50 If the number exceeds the limit entries are deleted starting with the oldest one The number of input points capacity of the internal memory options MAC address and the firmware version number of the RD MV200 can be displayed on the screen for confirmation Display the log screen system screen 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Log soft key The types of logs that can be displayed and the system screen are assigned to the soft keys and displayed 3 Press a soft key to display the log or the system screen Error soft key Displays a log of error messages Login soft key Displays a log of key login logout Commu soft key Displays a log of communication commands that have been executed FTP soft key Displays a log of file transfers made using the FTP client function System soft key Displays the system screen 4 Use the up and down keys to scroll through the log Returning to the operation screen To return to the operation screen from the log screen or the system screen press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu select the desired screen using the up and down arrow keys and then press the DISP ENTER key Error message log The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs Date and
73. ls the display and storage functioning properly In the event of problems see section 12 2 Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated If replacement is necessary see section 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts soueUD UIe 2 13 1 13 2 Replacing the Fuse A Replace the fuse every two years for preventive maintenance For safety reasons make sure to turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the RD MV200 from the main power supply before replacing the fuse To prevent the possibility of fire use only the specified fuse purchased from Omega Never short circuit the fuse holder to bypass the use of a fuse For fuse rating see section 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts Follow the procedures below to replace the fuse Turn OFF the power switch Disconnect the RD MV200 from the main power supply Remove the cover by pulling the lower part of it While pressing the fuse carrier turn it counterclockwise approximately 45 degrees The carrier and the fuse will slide out 1 2 3 4 Replace with a new fuse insert the carrier in the fuse holder and turn it clockwise while pressing the carrier to fix it in place Replace the cover 13 2 13 3 Calibration To maintain the measurement accuracy we recommend the RD MV200 be calibrated once a year Calibration service is also provided by Omega Requi
74. minutes after power on 2000 m or less above sea level With temperature variation of 10 C 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less for Volt and TC ranges Excluding the error of reference junction compensation 0 1 of rdg 2 digit or less for RTD ranges For 100 to 240 VAC power supply model With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 100 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less For 12 VDC power supply model With variation within 10 to 18 VDC 1 digit or less AC 50 60 Hz and DC 400 A m fields 0 1 of rdg 10 digits or less 14 16 14 7 General Specifications Input source resistance Transport and Storage Conditions e DC Volt range With variation of 1 kQ Ranges of 2 V or less within 10 uV Ranges of 6 V or greater 0 1 of rdg or less TC range With variation of 1 kQ Within 10 uV 100 uV when the burnout upscale downscale function is switched on e RTD range Pt100 With variation of 10 Q per wire resistance of all three wires must be equal 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less With maximum difference of 40 mohms between wires approximately 0 1 C The following specifies the environmental conditions required during transportation from shipment to the start of service and during storage as well as during transportation and storage if the RD MV200 is temporarily taken out of service No malfunction
75. nternal processing error TIMEOUT nternal processing error PRIORITY nternal processing error NVRAM nternal processing error 282 FTP control connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 282 Character String and Details HOSTNAME Failed the DNS lookup search the IP address corresponding to the host name Check the DNS setting and the destination host name TCPIP Internal processing error UNREACH Failed to connect to a control connection server Check the address setting and that the server is running OOBINLINE Internal processing error NAME Internal processing error CTRL The control connection does not exist Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period TAC Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period ECHO Failed to transmit data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period REPLY Failed to receive data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period SERVER The server is not in a condition to provide the service Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided 12 3 Bunooyseqn
76. of START STOP operations Report data M1 option Types Data format ASCII Hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly Max number of report data internal memory can hold 40 Screen image data Trigger Key operation Data format png format Output External storage medium or communication interface 14 8 14 4 Alarm Function Specifications Number of alarms Alarm types Alarm delay time Up to four alarms for each channel Upper and lower limits delay upper and lower limits difference upper and lower limits and upper limit and lower on rate of change Selectable from 1 s to 3600 s for each channel Interval time of rate of change alarms Display Hysteresis Relay outputs option Alarm information The scan interval times 1 to 15 common to all channels The alarm status type is displayed in the numerical value display area upon occurrence of an alarm A common alarm indication is also displayed in the status display section The alarm indication behavior non hold or hold type can be selectable for common to all channels On 0 5 of display span off selectable applied to upper and lower limits alarms common to all measurement channels Number of points 2 4 6 12 or 24 points Relay action Energized de energized hold non hold AND OR reflash actions selectable The date and time of alarm occurrences recoveries alarm types etc Up to 120 latest alarms are stored in
77. of this manual without Omega s permission is strictly prohibited Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Zip is a registered trademark of lomega Corporation Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated Company and product names that are used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders First edition September 2000 Disk No RE28 1st Edition September 2000 YK All Rights Reserved Copyright 2000 Omega Safety Precautions The RD MV200 conforms to IEC safety class AC power supply models are provided with terminal for protective grounding Installation Category Il and EN61326 1 EMC standard class A use in a commercial industrial or business environment The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation If the RD MV200 is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by the RD MV200 may be impaired Omega assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on the RD MV200 A Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual L Functional ground terminal Do not use this terminal as a prote
78. operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Aux Language Select the language Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Range of screen elements that are displayed in the specified language English and Japanese are used on all the screens German and French are used on the following screens For other screens the displays will be the same as those for English Screen menu in the operation mode displayed using the DISP ENTER key or arrow key e FUNC key menu in the operation mode displayed when the FUNC key is pressed e Error Messages Operation guide screens confirmation screen that appears when the STOP key is pressed or the selection screen that appears when exiting the basic setting mode for example 10 16 This page intentionally left blank suonoun 19440 2 10 17 This page intentionally left blank 10 18 This page intentionally left blank suonouny 194 0 2 10 19 This page intentionally left blank 10 20 This page intentionally left blank suonouny 194 0 2 10 21 10 14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Procedure e When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustm
79. option When using manual save Procedure The operation to save data in the internal memory to the external storage medium can be carried out when the storage medium is inserted into the drive 1 Insert the storage medium into the drive and press the MEDIA key A window with a confirming message Do you want to save measured data appears 2 Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER Key to save data Select No using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key not to save data Note You can select whether to save all the data residing in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved to the storage medium See section 8 10 If saving to the storage medium is prevented with the key lock function and the key lock is enabled data cannot be saved when the medium is inserted into the drive Turn OFF the key lock before inserting the medium Itis possible that the data in the internal memory are overwritten before the data are stored to the external storage medium due to limitations such as the capacity of the internal memory Refer to sections 8 2 and 8 3 and save the data to the external storage medium before they are overwritten For the memory usage display of the internal memory see section 4 2 Using the Status Display Section When the MEDIA key is pressed the RD MV200 checks whether or not an external storage medium is inserted in the drive When the external storage medium does not
80. or Key Alm Key Alarm Key The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation Key Alm The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 25 Aejdsiq oy Buneiado pue Huas 7 15 Assigning a Name to the 4 Screen Display Procedure This operation is carried out on the 4 screen display 1 2 Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu Pressing the 4Panel soft key displays the soft keys and a list of 4 screen display names Pressing one of the soft keys displays the window used to enter the screen name 4Panel name list 4Panel 1 MIX 4Panel 2 ALL TREND 4Panel 3 ALL DIGITAL 4Panel 4 ALL BAR APanel 1 4Panel 2 Panel 3 4Panel 4 Enter the screen name up to 16 alphanumeric characters For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering characters on page 3 22 R Pressing the DISP ENTER key validates the specified screen name and return to the 4 screen display To discard the specified screen name and close the window used to enter the screen name press the ESC key or the FUNC key 7 26 Chapter 8 Data Acquisition and Saving to Extern
81. or event data free mode are being acquired to the internal memory See the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 3 4 Run Mode Other key operations START STOP Start stop acquiring measured computed data For the operating procedure see sections 8 5 and 8 6 The waveform on the trend display also starts stops When the computation function M1 is equipped computation and the report function also start stop For the operating procedure see sections 11 3 and 11 12 MEDIA Detects the external storage medium and saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium in the manual save mode USER Execute the assigned function See section 10 1 Character number input key Enter passwords to release key lock or to login See sections 10 3 and 10 5 Enter a name for the 4 screen display See section 7 15 Functions of the Setting and Basic Setting Modes Configure functions using the arrow keys the DISP ENTER key the soft keys and the character number input keys See 3 5 Configuring the functions and chapters 5 through 11 for detail Also see section 9 1 to save the setup data suoneiado UoWWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SeWeN 7 3 9 3 5 Configuring the Functions Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode The basic setting mode is used to change the basic configuration of various functions Basic setting mode cannot be entered while data acquisition o
82. related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 8 20 8 9 Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Saved Data during Manual Save Note e The following character combinations can not be used as directory names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces or spaces at the top or in the middle of character strings are also not allowed for directory names 3 Save data Displayed when Manual Save is selected Select Unsave or All The initial setting is All Unsave Saves only the data that have not been saved when the medium is inserted into the drive All Save all the data residing in the memory when the medium is inserted into the drive Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead 8 21 8 10 Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data Basic Setting Mode Procedure Explanation Specify the channel for which the display or event data are to be acquired to the internal memory The waveforms of the specified channels can be displayed on the trend display The waveforms for the channels that are turned OFF are not displayed but numerical values bar graphs and alarms
83. restarts the operation after the power recovers Measured computed value Alarm setting Alarm Off a On Off 2n Power failure Power failure occurence recovery occurence recovery Operation when the alarm setting is changed If a new delay alarm is set the alarm detection starts at that time It is unaffected by the conditions existing before the alarm is set If the alarm setting of a preexisting delay alarm is changed Ifan alarm is not occurring at the time of the change alarm detection starts at the new setting e fan alarm is occurring at the time of the change and the alarm type is set to delay upper limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is above or equal to the new setting If the input is below the new setting the alarm turns OFF If the alarm type is set to delay lower limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is below or equal to the new setting If the input is above the new setting the alarm turns OFF 6 9 suuely Humas pue buibpe mouyoy H 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Procedure e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they cha
84. same value The RD MV200 converts the measured data within a value span derived by removing the decimal from the scaling upper and lower limits In other words conversion is performed by using a span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 to 5 and 100 if the scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 The resolution of the value derived by using a span of 10 is coarser than the value derived using a span of 100 Because the display becomes rough set this value so that it is greater than 100 Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Measurable range See sections listed below Mode Type Range Measurable Range Scale Volt See section 5 1 Voltage Input Setting TC See section 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting RTD See section 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting DI See section 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting 5 10
85. soft key menu 3 Press the Snapshot soft key The screen image is saved to the external storage medium USER key operation This applies only when Snapshot is assigned to the USER key This key operates in all run modes operation setting and basic setting modes The exact screen image that is displayed when the USER key is pressed is saved However error messages are not saved 1 Confirm the storage medium is in the drive 2 Press the USER key The screen image is saved to the external storage medium File format Screen image data is in PNG format File name File names are automatically assigned Month date hour and minute when the screen image data were stored sequence number to screen image data files Mddhhmma PNG where M month 1 to 9 X 10 Y 11 Z 12 dd date hh hour mm minute a sequence number Note The sequence number of the file name is normally set to 0 However if the screen image data is saved twice within a minute for example then the file name of the two files will have sequence numbers 0 and 1 for the first and second files respectively The two files will have the same Mddhhmm month day hour minute section 9 13 eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue sayi4 GBuibeuew fa 9 7 Clearing Data from the Internal Memory Procedure Clears display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and logs from the internal memory e These
86. standards energize de energize alarm output relay eee 6 12 entering Characters ccece naini 3 22 entering numbers GNTOMMESSageS as Nis eerain Hessians aa ESG KOY ieis Ve e tate vart deta Ethernet port event data expanding the time axis wie 4 22 EXPONENT ee eeeeeeeeees 11 1 OXIQNSION iisccsseivsccsesideateatiacectss 8 2 external storage media handling 22 1 external storage medium Condition 00 eee eeeeeeeeees 4 4 extemal MQM cxcisivecetidesrecaveis exerateaetivesls otndewaesireeiis 8 5 external trigger for event data remote control 10 14 F Fahrenheit ccessencceevsscessecmpenccsstenuedceantarenderbasveccesstaesccerpants FAIL memory end function FDISK suree a a file format file header file name floppy disk format time format type POMMACING eE E ee a ihe free fOC SPaCe A E E EEE E E uiteees MOMUPAME AE A E A A A 3 1 FTP test 1 3 8 FUNC key 3 8 functional ground terminal ii 3 3 TUSE ena E NE EEE EE e EE EAA TEE 3 1 Go os ReePaer er Rrrrer ren ere rer ree A T 7 24 group display snene a a e ccte 1 5 4 11 H H 6 6 E E A EE E E E 6 6 half Screen diISplay cessisse iieiea iaaea a cota cts 1 17 historical trend r 1 16 hold non hold alarm indication 6 13 hold non hold alarm output relay 6 13 hourly PE POM essenin a aa a 11 23 loo initial setting 4 screen display
87. summer time and the winter time are defined by the daylight savings time adjustment function For detail see section 10 14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Press wew To display the window for the date and time setting press the soft key 6 COTTE kes Winter 1 YY MM DD HH MM SS Enter the date and time Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the date and time Enter the date and time and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numbers see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Pressing the DISP ENTER key closes the window without setting the DST box To cancel the setting and close the window press the ESC key 2 DST Daylight savings time adjustment function Summer or Winter is displayed in the DST box corresponding to the date and time indicated in the YY MM DD HH MM SS box when the window is opened Operate as follows to set Summer or Winter for the date and time entered Pressing the right arrow key shifts the cursor to the DST box Select Summer or Winter by the soft key and press the DISP ENTER key The window closes To cancel the setting and close the window press the ESC key before pressing the DISP ENTER key 3 24 Chapter 4 Switching Operation Screens 4 1 Operation Screens This chapter describes the screen operation screen used to display the measured computed da
88. that can be acquired The following table shows the maximum number of data points per channel that can be acquired Data being acquired Maximum number of data points per channel Display data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 100 000 Display data and event data Display data 900 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 120 000 Sampling length The sampling length can be derived from the following equation Sampling length the maximum number of data points per channel x sampling interval Calculation example Display data only Measurement channel 2 computation channel none Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 2 CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 150 000 However since 100 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 100 000 Display rate When set to 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 100 000 data p
89. the numbers in the above figure Note First channel and last channel Select the desired channels Mode Set the mode to Scale Type Select the input type from Volt TC RTD and DI Range Select the input range using the soft keys according to the input type Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value 5 9 su s jeuueyo jueweinseayy 7 5 5 Scaling Setting Explanation Note Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Allowed range 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions SEE Cee SEE EE Oudd m Oo0adgd The decimal position is determined by the scale lower limit setting e Scale lower limit and scale upper limit cannot be set to the
90. the equation up to 40 characters Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter an equation Enter the equation using the following key operations and press the DISP ENTER key For writing equations see Rules for writing an equation common items in section 11 2 First CH i Hath ranae 1 Maximum of 48 character can be entered bat i 2 Use numerical keys to enter math equation petion e 2 se soft key lt Change key to change nunbers and operator SARC ABS LOGC EXP E NE GT LT GE LE 4 f S AND NOT XOR OR LOG AVEC TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG SUM TLOG P P 11 10 11 4 Setting Computation Channels Left and right arrow key Select the input position Character number input key Enter computing elements Use the 1 M soft key to switch the function of the character number input key between number input and computing element input See the explanation DEL soft key Delete the character at the cursor position BS soft key Delete the character before the cursor position INS soft key Switch between insert and overwrite Each time the INS soft key is pressed insert and overwrite switches The selected function is displayed to the right of the soft key display section Over Overwrites the cursor position Ins Inserts at the cursor position 1 M soft key Switch the function of the character number input key between n
91. the input range The difference computation channel displays the computed result of the measured value of the difference computation channel the measured value of the reference channel Select the input type for the difference computation channel from DC voltage thermocouple RTD and digital input The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key ot l 1 First CH Last CH Range Hode Span Type Range Lower Upper Ref CH DA vot f 2 000 2 000 fa i 2 Note 3 4 5 6 For the setting procedure of the reference junction compensation and the burnout for the thermocouple input see section 5 9 First channel and last channel Set the channels that will measure the difference Mode Set the mode to Delta Type Select the input type from Volt TC RTD and DI Range If the type is Volt enter the input range If it is TC or RTD enter the type of TC or RTD If it is DI enter Level or
92. the scale is less than or equal to one digit the value is displayed as _ _ or o OL Example 1 If the scale is set to 0 05 to 0 5 the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0 05 to 0 50 Example 2 If the scale is set to 0 005 to 0 05 the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 0 00 to 0 05 Rule 3 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is greater than or equal to two digits and less than four digits the value is displayed with the decimal fraction is discarded Example 3 If the scale is set to 0 1 to 1000 0 the scale display for the upper and lower limits is 0 to 1000 Rule 4 If the integer section of either value at the end of the scale is greater than or equal to five digits a four digit mantissa and exponent are displayed x10 or x10 for example Example 4 If the scale is set to 10 to 20000 the scale display for the upper and lower limits are 1 to 2000 x 10 Rule 5 If the difference in the number of digits between the upper and lower limits of the scale is larger than the number of digits that can be displayed the smaller value is set to zero 0 0 0 or 0 00 Example 5 If the scale is set to 0 0005 to 0 5000 the upper and lower limits of the scale are displayed as 0 00 to 0 50 Unit The unit is displayed near the center of the scale When the partial expanded display is used the position will be shifted When the trend is displayed horizontally the number of
93. time of occurrence Error code Error message 885 085 Time No Hessage Jan 12 2088 08 36 47 261 Not enough free space on media Jan 12 2088 08 36 19 218 Hedia has not been inserted Jan 11 2088 04 15 38 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 84 15 28 BAS The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 83 23 19 681 Neasured data have been initialized 10 10 10 7 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen Key login logout log 807 887 Time 1 0 No User Name Jan 61 2088 8 59 34 In al user1 Jan 01 2000 88 59 29 Out Jan 01 2000 88 52 51 In al user1 Jan 81 2688 88 21 45 In al user1 Jan 81 2888 88 15 17 In a user1 Jan 81 2088 88 14 45 Out Jan 81 2008 88 14 35 In G1 user User name User No Date time Login logout Communication command log For detail see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 887 887 Time ID User Name 1 0 Message Link D Jan 06 2000 18 52 23 1 user lt Logout Jan 06 2000 18 52 23 1 user gt ca Jan_06 2008 18 51 48 1 user lt 258 _ 1 Message Jan 86 2608 18 51 48 1 user gt FD 8 001 810 Jan 66 2808 18 51 41 1 user lt EB Jan 06 2000 18 51 41 1 user gt BOB Jan 06 2888 18 51 37 1 user lt Login 1 0 symbol gt input lt output Name of the user that accessed this instrument A number used to identify the user that is co
94. time thet report was created The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type Date and time the report started Index 2 2 Kind Hourly Start Jan 1 2008 80 10 46 Timeup Jan 1 2008 68 11 61 Channel Unit Ave Max Hin Sum CHB1 v 6 888 8 888 6 088 8 889880E 88 CHB v 6 088 8 888 6 088 8 880800E 88 CHES v 0 196 8 964 8 743 3 916808E 80 CHad v 6 688 8 888 6 088 8 889800E 88 CHES v 6 888 6 888 6 088 8 880800E 88 CHEB v 8 132 0 186 0 026 2 648000E 00 CHO v 8 128 0 174 0 012 2 391000E 00 CHES v 8 118 0 164 8 081 2 202000E 00 CHOS Ki 6 101 0 155 0 007 2 029000E 00 CHI Y 8 898 0 144 0 018 1 793080E 80 CHIL Ki 0 286 0 282 0 290 5 718000E 00 CHI2 v 8 293 0 289 0 297 5 867000E 00 CH13 v 8 301 8 297 0 305 6 029000E 00 CHId v 0 307 8 304 8 311 6 147000E 08 CH15 v 0 312 0 308 0 315 6 235000E 00 CH16 v 8 315 8 312 8 319 6 384000E 08 CHI v 0 322 8 318 0 326 6 447000E 00 CH18 v 8 328 8 325 0 332 6 568000E 08 CHIS Y 0 333 8 330 0 337 6 669000E 08 CH28 v 8 341 8 338 0 344 6 821000E 08 CH21 Y 0 325 9 32 0 329 6 505000E 08 CH22 v 8 332 8 329 8 336 6 645000E 08 CH23 Y 8 339 0 336 0 343 6 771000E 08 CH24 v 8 347 8 344 8 351 6 932000E 00 CH25 Y 8 351 8 349 0 356 7 025000E 00 CH26 v 0 355 0 352 0 359 7 097000E 00 CH27 Y 0 362 8 359 0 366 7 232008E 88 CH28 v 0 368 0 365 0 372 7 351000E 00 CH2
95. to User 7 Character string User ID 1to7 Password Enter setup Enable Disable Save Load Save settings Initialize Load settings Delete Format Initialize Option Action NO 1 to NO 8 Start Stop _ Trigger Alatm ACK Remote Time adj Math Math rst M sample Pnl 1 load Pnl 2 load Pnl 3 load Message 1 Message 2 Message3 Message4 Message 5 Message 6 Message7 Message 8 Option Mode Off Relative Initial setting Timer 1 Absolute LoG Interval Absolute 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min Timer 2 3 Off 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min fr 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h 24h Relative Numerical value Ref time Numerical value Initial setting is 0 00 Reset Action Option Report set Day Day Week Report Day Month Date Numerical value Date of the week SUN MON TUE WEN THU FRI SAT Time hour Numerical value App 5 xipueddy z Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Option Report CH R02 R03 R04 Report R05 R06 R07 Ros R09 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 R18 R19 R20 R21 R22 R23 R24 R25 R26 R27 R28 R29 R30 On Off Off Channel Up to model
96. to the numbers in the above figure 1 Use Not Select Use or Not If Use is selected various parameters are displayed Use Use key lock Not Do not use key lock 2 Password Set the password used to release the key lock in the operation mode Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 3 For each parameter select whether or not to enable the key lock Free Disable Lock Enable Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 4 10 4 Setting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode Explanation Key locked parameter and the behavior during key lock can be set individually Parameter Behavior during key lock START key STOP key MENU key USER key DISP ENTER key Alarm ACK soft key Math Computation Math START soft key Math STOP soft key Math reset soft key Write memory Message soft key Manual sample soft key Trigger soft key Save Display soft key Save Event soft key Disabled Disabled Disabled Disab
97. up to the time of the power disruption are used At the next scheduled TLOG computation time data will be used from the point in time after the power was restored Before the time to create After power is restored TLOG data are created at the normally the TLOG data scheduled time to perform the TLOG computation All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the measured computed data are handled when there is an abnormality in the data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data AVE MAX MIN P P SUM Positive over not used used not used Negative over not used used not used Error not used not used not used over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels 11 17 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog F 11 8 Setting the Timer Number and Sum Scale for TLOG Computation Procedure Set the number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG Also set the sum scale that is used when determining the sum in TLOG SUM These are set in the setting mode The timer specifications are set in the basic setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are change
98. value MAX MIN e When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value Positive over range 99999 minimum value Negative over range 99999 SUM When all data are measurement errors or over Blank Sum value range When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value e When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value When the minimum value is below 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the equation is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 SUM When all data are computation errors or Blank Sum value computation overflow e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 xipueddy z App 11 Index Symbols 4 Screen GSP AY nssncccssvseccceistecccgcsseeracecnedeeceesnasredecnetercceess 1 15 A absolute mode absolute value ACCESS AMP este hasty ne ieee esa itie
99. with a floppy disk drive with a Zip drive memory card drive og n f o 1 n on f an an a Q od s83 O 18 19 18 Storage medium drive Floppy disk drive Zip drive or ATA flash memory card drive depending on the specification 19 Eject button access lamp for Zip drive Used when ejecting the storage medium Also is the access lamp for the Zip drive The access lamp is lit while the Zip disk is being accessed 20 Access lamp for the floppy disk drive The access lamp is lit while the floppy disk is being accessed 3 2 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions Rear Panel 6 2 1 1 12 VDC 3 RS 232 3 RS 422 A 485 1 Power terminals 2 Ethernet port Connect the Ethernet cable 10Base T 3 Serial interface port C2 C3 option RS 232 port or RS 422 A 485 port depending on the specification Connect the serial interface cable 4 Input terminals Connect the input signal cable of the item being measured 5 Option termi
100. 0 Updating trend z upper limit alarm sssi eee 1 22 upper limit on rate of change alarm eeeeeeeeeeeees 1 23 usage condition internal memory eee ee eee 4 3 user ID WSR KO sienna an E ameeey ten 1 29 3 1 USEN ONG siasissccnncccencenecensastiosiansb veered cediimsesneniansadadenentainbele 10 9 V version MUIMDOR rraioa aaa ra aTa VGA DUDUT cis ieia a a na VGA output terminal VIDEO OUT terminal viewing display data z viewing event ata os cccceccsccccce cee scecesescdeceesedev sca sindevscnecasarstes VOIUNMMOMAMC cs onccssatsscacceate cesccest vacevessvevesiesseescerantuedesanenigece W WAVEFOIM HINES ooo eee eee cece iarta aadis WEGKIY TEPON aranana ria fee E iesetinies wiring alarm output yi wiring FAIL memory end ececceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 wiring input Signal cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 2 3 wiring remote control 2 12 wiring VGA output 2 13 writing messages remote control cee eee 10 15 Zo ZIP OISK Gia avesveecssisi e EN Mattie AS 3 5 ZONE CISPIAY ctr near ani Yeas areca 1 8 Index 4 WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OMEGA ENGINEERING INC warrants this unit to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 13 months from date of purchase OMEGA s WARRANTY adds an additional one 1 month grace period to the normal one 1 year product warranty to cover handling and shipping tim
101. 0 9MB 03MB Display data Event data E Display data Event data Display data are used to display waveforms on the RD MV200 s screen Display data consists of maximum and minimum values of the measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot on the time axis on the screen Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and are useful for long term observations Event data are instantaneous values of the measured computed data at specified sampling intervals of the event data By setting the sampling interval equal to the scan interval all measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval can be saved In addition the event data generated when an event occurs an alarm for example can also be saved This is useful when you wish to observe the measured computed data in detail For detail see sections 8 1 and 8 2 The time period corresponding to one dot on the screen 7 Display data Maximum value s Minum value Measurement data N Event data i pl a Scan interval ye gt Sampling inteval for event data 1 20 1 4 Storage Function Manual sampled data Every time a given key operation is carried out all measured computed data instantaneous values at that point are acquired to the internal memory However this excludes measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turn
102. 00 S o eN ana 281 6 11 09 1 63 Approximately 10 degrees dimensions less than 10 mm is 0 3 mm suonesioads i Appendix Appendix 1 Setting mode Initial settings are thick framed Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Range 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV Other parameters 6V 20V Upper lower limits of span TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT Other parameters Upper lower limits of span Scale Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters 6V 20V Upper lower limits of span Upper lower limits of scale TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT DI Level Cont Unit Character string Delta Volt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters 6V 20V Upper lower limits of span TC R S B K E J T N w L U RTD PT JPT DI Level Cont Ref CH Up to model types DI Level Cont Other parameters Upper lower limits of span Sqrt 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2V Other parameters a Upper lower limits of span 6V 20V Upper lower limits of scale Unit Character string Skip Alarm On Off On Off Type H L h l R f t Value Numerical value Relay On Off On Off Number 101 to 106 111 to 116 121 to 126 131 to 136 Up to model types Tag Tag Character string Initial setting is
103. 01 80 54 10100540 DEY 2000 01 01 80 54 16188568 DHR 2088 81 81 80 56 Deleting files and directories can be executed in the same procedure as that in the setting mode See page 9 9 Formatting the external storage medium in the basic setting mode Formats the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the setting mode Procedure e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press soft key to display the Format screen Format Volume name Type Quick Formatting the external storage medium can be executed in the same procedure as that in the setting mode See page 9 11 9 12 9 6 Saving the Screen Image Procedure Explanation The screen image that is displayed is saved to the external storage medium using the FUNC key or USER key operation The data size of the screen image is approximately 12 KB screen Only when Snapshot is assigned to the USER key See section 10 2 FUNC key operation This operation is carried out in the operation mode The images of soft keys or messages are not saved 1 Confirm the storage medium is in the drive 2 Press the FUNC key to display the
104. 03 operates as reflash alarms They are fixed to OR logic operation Specifying AND produces no effect Relays 111 112 113 are used for models without 101 to 106 Energize De energize operation of the alarm output relay You can select whether to energize or de energize the alarm output relay when the alarm occurs By selecting de energize the alarm output relay will operate in the same manner as when the alarm occurs when the power supply is disrupted Energize or de energize applies to all alarm output relays The initial setting is set to energize O O O ae O Energized NO O z e z fo QO z e z fo le z e De energized NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Power failure Alarm off Alarm on NO Normally opened C common and NC normally closed 6 12 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay When the alarm changes from an ON state to the OFF state you can select to Turn OFF the output relay in sync with the alarm release non hold Turn OFF the output relay with an alarm acknowledge operation hold This applies to all alarm output relays The initial setting is set to Nonhold When set to non hold Alarm on Alarm off Shows the status of the normally opened NO contact of the relay The status is the reverse for the normally closed contact Relay output on Relay output wl Lo When set to hold Ala
105. 08 82 37 19 Jan 1 2008 82 37 39 i TAG 83 21 Jan 801 2000 62 36 48 Jan 81 2000 62 37 68 Mark Alarm info Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Displays alarm information Mark Red Released Mark Green Hold Activated Displays alarm information Mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Released Mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACk Alarm output relay option When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work Relay Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Active Released Idle Hold Activated Active temporarily suspend with alarm ACK Released Idle with alarm ACK When the alarm output relay is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Activated i i Al arm Released re Activated Alarm output or relay Released i 6 2 Alarm Setting Procedure This section describes the procedures related to setting the alarm specification on each channel The auxiliary alarm function are set in the basic setting mode See section 6 4 Note Set the measurement range before setting the alarm All of the alarm settings of a channel are canceled in the following cases e When the input type is changed Volt TC etc When the input range is changed When displaying the scale or computing the squa
106. 1 2 or 4 when acquiring display and event data Event Data length The size of the event data file is expressed as a length of time over which data are acquired The data length that can be specified varies depending on the sampling interval sample rate in item 3 number of blocks and the number of measurement and computation channels that are acquired Event Pre Trigger This is the range of data to be acquired before the trigger point It is specified as a percentage of the data length 0 5 25 50 75 95 and 100 If 0 is selected all data after the trigger point are acquired The initial setting is 0 Event Trigger Key When using key operation to activate the trigger turn this parameter On External When using remote control function option to activate the trigger turn this parameter On Alarm When using alarms as triggers turn this parameter On If the Alarm parameter is turned On trigger is activated if any one of the alarms occurs If Alarm parameter is turned On and the alarm was already activated when the START key is pressed trigger is also activated OR logic applies to the Key External and Alarm parameters If any one of the conditions that are turned On is met the trigger is activated e Acquiring display data and event data 2 Note If Auto auto save is selected in step 1 and E D is selected in step 2 set the auto save interval for the display data See section 8 8
107. 1 00 54 2000 01 01 00 40 2000 01 01 00 40 2000 01 01 00 54 2000 01 01 00 54 2000 01 01 00 54 2000 01 01 00 54 2000 01 01 00 56 Deleting a file in a directory 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name frame select the directory in which the file you wish to delete exists using the up and down arrow keys The File name frame displays a list of files in the selected directory is the root directory 2 Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor onto the File name frame Use the up and down arrow keys to select the file to be deleted 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 4 Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to delete the selected file The file is cleared from the file list To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Note If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu 9 9 eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue sayi4 GBuibeuew fa 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Deleting all the files in the directory 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name frame select the directory in which the files you wish to delete exist using the up and down arrow keys The File name frame displays a list of files in the selected directory is the root directory 2
108. 1 5 Measured computed value C mY Unit 1 338 0104 eA ie 0 907 0 618 Updating of the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2s TAG 04 TAG 02 TAG 05 Alarm mark DOG TAG 06 The measured computed data are displayed using bar graphs See section 4 3 Bar graph display Horizontal Starting point of the bar center Alarm point mark Bar graph 2 000 I 2 000 TAG GL Tag Channel no 1 389 ec Unit 2 000 2 000 TAG 02 Alarm mark i oOo H 8 96 Alarm type i DOGG L 2 000 2 000 TAG B3 i i i i 0 483 Measured cn computed data 2 000 2 000 ITAG BA i f i I L L 0 034 ny 2 009 2 008 ITAG 05 I 0 551 URI er pH 2 000 2 008 TAG B6 i a 1 038 y Bar graph display Vertical Tag Channel no Ta B1 TAG B2 TAG 83 TAG BA TAG 85 TAG 06 Alarm mark 2 000 mumun Da ug noe 2 000 a Upper limit of span Alarm point mark 4 Sc
109. 11 Measurement channels to display the trend applies also to measurement channels that data are to be acquired 8 10 Use not use the partial expanded display 7 12 Bar graph Channel display color applies also to trends 7 8 Bar graph direction vertical horizontal 7 13 Number of display scale divisions applies also to trends 7 10 Bar graph base position 7 10 LCD Background color white or black 7 13 Brightness 7 14 Backlight saver specifications 7 14 Settings related to data storage Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Data acquisition 8 11 Types of data to be acquired Event data Sampling interval Mode Free Trigger Rotate Number of blocks number of memory divisions Data length file size e Pre trigger position e Type of trigger to use Channel selections for data acquisition 8 10 Measurement channels that data are to be acquired applies also to measurement channels for which to display the trend Computation channels option that data are to be acquired applies also to computation channels for which to display the trend Storage media Name of the directory to which data are e to be saved 8 9 File header string 8 9 Range of data to be saved during manual save 8 9 Auto save interval during auto save 8 8 Save method to the storage media auto save or manual save 8 11 Memory end alarm option
110. 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 8h 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1 day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 14 day 14 day 14 day 31 day 31 day 8 25 wnp n 6e e10 s jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 12 Storing Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sampling Procedure The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory with a key operation Computation channels are options For details related to the write operation of the manual sampled data to the internal memory and the storage operation to the external storage medium see sections 8 3 and 8 4 For the data format of the manual sampled data see appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Manual sample soft key The instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are stored to the internal memory Manual sample Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out only when the manual sampling is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the U
111. 2 W W 5 Rd W 26 Rd Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 3 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 4 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 5 Measuring current i 1 mA A D Integration Time Selectable from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms 50 60 Hz for RD MV210 RD 220 RD 230 or AUTO automatic selection from 20 ms and 16 7 ms by detection of power supply frequency Thermocouple Burnout Burnout upscale downscale function can be switched ON OFF for each channel Burnout upscale downscale selectable Filter RD MV204 RD MV208 Signal damping On off selectable for each channel Time constant selectable from 2 5 and 10 seconds 14 1 suonesiioeds fa 14 1 Input Specifications RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Moving average On off selectable for each channel Number of samples to be averaged is selectable from 2 to 16 Computation Differential computation Between any two channels Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Linear scaling Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters Square root Square root computation and linear scaling Available for Volt range Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 c
112. 2 sscsciaeeniacnnanawanaeghaigainnae 2 13 2 8 Power Supply WINDOS nisse i arisen aiid aniig Guidi sedi na nA 2 14 Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations 3 1 Names of Parts and FUNCTIONS c cesceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceaeeceneeseeeseaeeseaeeeeeseaeeseneeeaees 3 1 3 2 Turning ON OFF the Powel SWICK 20 05 cc 00 cccececcpchavssaessccaieascnsbassduasadcosneabsnesenageuacadenesaraes 3 4 3 3 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium c cece eee eee ceeeeeeeeeee 3 5 3 4 R n MOOG ics airina ena a aaa a a EE aR ERE 3 7 35 Go nfig uring the FUNCIONS eessen aaa EEEa NE 3 10 3 6 Common Key Operations ossirrisesinisisnaate N tairi eines 3 19 3 7 Setting the Date and Time ee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeseneeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseaeeeeetees 3 24 Switching Operation Screens 4 1 Operation Screens spor siare eroa E aeaea a aE REEN 4 1 42 Using the Status Display SECtON sisisisiesiriisieuriearepiody nadies 4 2 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens s essssssesseesissrsernssrnrrrsrnrrrnrrnnrnrernsennes 4 5 4 4 Using the Overview Screen ceccesceesceeesceesseeeseeeeaeesneseseeseaeeeaeersaeesaeseaeeseaeeeseeeeaeenaes 4 12 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory SUMMAN serorei A evitiresci dame a ES E a Edad atara asia 4 14 4 6 Using the HistoriCal Trendlerini aaa aE ERAN 4 20 4 7 Using the 4 Sereen DiSplAY iisisti iiien aiiiar iigiin 4 25
113. 20 00 V Delta TC R 1760 0 to 1760 0 C 3168 to 3168 F S 1760 0 to 1760 0 C 3168 to 3168 F B 1820 0 to 1820 0 C 3276 to 3276 F K 1570 0 to 1570 0 C 2826 to 2826 F E 1000 0 to 1000 0 C 1800 0 to 1800 0 F J 1300 0 to 1300 0 C 2340 0 to 2340 0 F T 600 0 to 600 0 C 1080 0 to 1080 0 F N 1300 0 to 1300 0 C 2340 to 2340 F Ww 2315 0 to 2315 0 C 4167 to 4167 F L 1100 0 to 1100 0 C 1980 0 to 1980 0 F U 600 0 to 600 0 C 1080 0 to 1080 0 F Delta RTD Pt100 800 0 to 800 0 C 1440 0 to 1440 0 F JPt100 750 0 to 750 0 C 1350 0 to 1350 0 F Delta DI Level 1to1 Contact 1to1 The relationship with the reference channel Even if the input type or the measurement range of the difference computation channel and the reference channel is not the same the difference computation is performed according to the following rules e When the decimal position between the reference channel and the difference computation channel is different the measured value of the reference channel is adjusted to the decimal position of the measured value of the difference computation channel to make the computation Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 and the measured value of the reference channel is 100 0 the computation result becomes 10 00 100 0 90 00 e When the units for the reference channel and the difference computation channel are
114. 208 8 channels 125 ms or 250 ms RD MV210 10 channels 1sor2s RD MV220 20 channels 1sor2s RD MV230 30 channels 1sor2s Input Type and Computation You can select the input type of a measurement channel from DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector RTD and digital input contact signal or voltage signal You can also perform computation on the measured data such as the difference square root and scaling The input type and computation are configured as an input mode on the RD MV200 For the procedure related to setting the different modes see sections 5 1 to 5 7 Input Mode Notation Description DC voltage Thermocouple Resistance temperature detector Digital input Difference Square root Scaling Skip Volt TC RTD DI Delta Sqrt Scale Skip Measures a DC voltage in the range 20 mV to 20 V Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for R S B K E J T N W L and U Measures the temperature corresponding to the appropriate range for Pt100 JPt100 Cu10 and CU25 Displays the contact input or voltage input signals by correlating them to 0 or 100 of the display range Contact input Closed contact is 1 Open contact is 0 Voltage input Less than 2 4 V is 0 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V is 1 When the input type is set to DC voltage thermocouple RTD or digita
115. 3 serial interface port esanian aai 3 3 Index 3 Index S flal NUMBER ariii anid aeria i iv 1 27 setting items basic setting mode O17 setting items setting mode 3 14 setting mode 0 02 3 7 3 10 setting screen 1 18 settings alarm 3 114 settings computation 3 13 settings data Storage cece cece eeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeenes 3 12 Settings display anise a 3 12 settings input Set MOOS assinei arnar Ya Vaa shunt resistor skip is SMAPS MOL aas sa aa Er E A A AAT soft key soft keys software specifications 3 terminal isolated RTD input 0 0 eee 14 13 GUID ive cstevswnnisersnadvsastcanen take 14 9 alarm output relays 14 11 batch function i 14 11 communication Ethernet computation functions 14 12 data Storage sssr diin snenia aai aani i iE 14 5 dimensional drawings cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 14 19 display ts FAIL memory end output 0 0 ce eee eee eeeeeee 14 11 generala iair reper rer enrrerecrerere ct AE 14 14 serial communication interface standard operation conditions 14 14 VGA OUP tsiere 14 11 speed of movement of waveforms zs SQM E A square root square root COMpUtation s ssssssisineneieinieinsnsennnnee enee 5 12 stack over STACKS iope i eee aae EEEN ENEE Ea TAa START KOY oa raea ia a AEA start stop computation remote control start stop
116. 5 6 Square Root Computation Setting Procedure Computes the square root of the DC voltage input The result can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed Set the upper and lower limits of the input s display span the upper and lower limits after scaling and the unit The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key owt 4 H First CH Last CH jar Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper 2y 2 000 2 000 Scale Lower Upper Unit aaa 200 00 f i 2 3 5 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Sqrt 3 Range Select the input range from 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2 V 6 V and 20 V 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the measurement span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input ke
117. 7 and 7 13 1 7 SUON OUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 3 Display Function Scale display A scale appropriate for the measured item can be displayed for each channel The number of divisions of the display scale created by the main scale marks can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 div also applies to the bar graph display Medium and small scale marks are displayed in between the main scale marks You can select whether or not to display the scale for each channel and the display position Section 7 10 Turn ON OFF the numerical The numerical display section can be turned ON or OFF If display section the numerical display section is turned OFF the display shows only the waveform and the scale gt Section 4 3 Zone display The waveform of each channel is displayed in its display range zone The waveforms are easier to view because they do not overlap See the explanation of the zone display below Section 7 9 Partial expanded display You can expand the important section of the display area See the explanation of the partial expanded display below gt Sections 7 11 and 7 12 Explanation regarding the zone display The display range of the waveform is called a zone Zones can be set for each channel The waveforms can be set in different zones so that they are easier to view In the example shown in the figure below channel 1 is displayed in the zone 0 to 30 channel 2 in the zon
118. 8 9 and 10 from the top The number of scale divisions span and unit are the same as those of the examples provided for the trend horizontal display H i E a esr ES ae eee Leta 5 EEA Lt ie aan LL A ale ae Aine LI Md 100 ann l 1 L a R p 66 nA Esa W U LI 14 pitty ade E kd oe Phdr A UII a Lilt 100 fi i NIT BO 00 Wo Uun i 7 l EER d uedd o an 20 Litt titi a0 LI a Lit LI Litt Hy i i 400 f Lil iit ie H J 46 Lt Tid s Lit ti LI Lo 00 mi ul i Lulu igg HH ndg hil 00 g Ay UU uuu LUL mn a py ulu auhi Literate nine lmin diy e If the scales for two or more channels are specified to the same position the scale for the channel that was assigned first to the group is displayed Example 1 When the channels were assigned to a group in the following order 03 02 01 05 and the scale display positions for channels 3 2 1 and 5 are all set to 1 The scale for channel 3 is displayed at position 1 e Vacant positions in between scale assigned positions are void The scales are displayed close together from the di
119. 808 82 34 33 amp TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2808 82 33 42 Jan 01 2008 82 34 02 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2008 02 33 11 Jan 01 2000 82 33 31 3 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 32 40 Jan 81 2808 42 33 00 S TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2808 82 32 89 Jan 1 2808 82 32 29 2 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 31 38 Jan 81 2008 82 31 58 E TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2808 62 31 87 Jan B1 2808 82 31 27 F TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2008 02 30 36 Jan 01 2800 82 30 56 2 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 30 05 Jan 1 2808 82 30 25 g TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 29 34 Jan 1 2808 82 29 54 5 Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel no Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Date amp Time Alarm activated Date amp Time Alarm released Mark see section 6 1 Recalling the historical trend at the time the alarm occurred This operation is carried out on the Alarm Summary screen 1 Select the alarm of which to display the historical trend using the up and down arrow keys 828 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG a3 21 Jan 81 2888 82 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 39 88 Jan 1 2888 82 39 28 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 62 38 21 Jan 1 2088 82 38 46 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2888 62 37 58 Jan 1 2088 82 38 18 Selected alarm m TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2888 62 37 19 Jan 1 2888 82 37 39 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 62 36 48 Jan 1 2888 82 37 08 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 62 36 17 Jan 1 2888 82 36 37 TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2008 82 35 46 Jan 1 2008 82 36 06 2 Pr
120. 9 v 0 372 8 370 8 377 7 448000E 06 CH30 v 8 379 8 376 8 384 7 588000E 00 Status of data see section 11 11 Procedure Displaying the report data option This operation is carried out on the Message Summary screen For detail of the report data see section 11 11 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select REPORT DATA using the up and down arrow keys INFOR 2 MATION C5 JUMP TO REPORT 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the report data To close the menu without displaying the report data press the ESC key 4 18 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Changing the report data to be displayed The index number of the report data currently displayed the number of report data sets in the internal memory is displayed in the Index column of the report data display The most recent report data set is the one with the largest report data index number When the report data are being displayed the arrow keys can be pressed to switch the report being displayed The operation when the four arrow keys are pressed are as follows Up arrow key Displays next report data Down arrow key Displays the previous report data Right arrow key Displays the report data that is 10 data sets after the report data being displayed However
121. Alarm indication The alarm condition can be confirmed with the alarm icon in the status display section and the alarm indication on the operation screen such as the trend display The indicator pattern varies depending on the hold non hold setting The alarm icon in the status display section P m Fro cone 05 57 23 ed DISP MN thour 6 16 C 5 Alarm icon Indicator Hold Non hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Red icon Released No icon displayed Hold Activated Blinking red icon Stops blinking with alarm ACK Released Blinking green icon icon disappears with alarm ACK When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work 6 1 suuely Humas pue buibpe mouyoy H 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Non hold Activated Alarm Released Red icon Indication No icon Hold Activated Released Blinking red Red icon icon i Blinking red Blinking green i icon a gt l le icon a pl te No icon E Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Alarm indication in the trend display Measured value Alarm mark Alarm type Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark alarm type measured values All red Released Alarm mark Green color Alarm type Not displayed
122. E Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 1 First CH Last CH a EE p Zone F Lower a3 Upper 100 r Graph Division IM 2 Bar graph Normal 3 Scale position 1 1 4 Partial On Off Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 7 15 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Zone and Partial are also simultaneously set Setting the number of divisions for the scale 2 Division This is the number of scale divisions The scale is equally divided and scale marks are displayed at the divided position Select the number of divisions from 4to 12 For bar graph display Only the main scale marks are displayed For trend display See Explanation Setting the bar graph s base position 3 Bar graph base position of the bar graph Select normal or center Note When the bar graph is displayed vertically see section 7 13 the base position is fixed to Normal the bottom of the bar graph is the base position Setting the scale position on the trend display 4 Scale position The Scale position is used to set the scale display position for each channel
123. French and Japanese German and French are used on the following screens For other screens the displays will be the same as those for English Screen menu in the operation mode FUNC key menu in the operation mode Error Messages Operation guide screens C or F selectable 14 4 14 3 Data Storage Specifications External storage medium Selectable from e 3 5 inch floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB e PCMCIA ATA flash memory card 4 to 160 MB e Zip disk 100 MB Saving method Manual or automatic selectable Manual saving Data saving by inserting external storage medium Automatic saving Display data Periodic saving 10 min to 31 days to external storage medium Event data In case of trigger free Periodic saving 3 min to 31 days to external storage medium In case of using trigger Save the data when data acquisition is finished Sampling Interval Display data Linked with the waveform display update rate Event data Linked with the specified sampling interval Sampling Interval for Event Data A sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval cannot be specified RD MV204 RD MV208 Selectable from 125 250 500 ms and 1 2 5 10 30 60 120s RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Selectable from 1 2 5 10 30 60 and 120s File types The following two file types can be created e Event data file stores instantaneous values acquired periodically at a specified sampling interval e Display data file stores
124. ID Not Do not use the user ID For models with the batch function The key login function of all users 1 to 7 item 4 turns Off item 5 when User ID is changed to Use from Not Number This is the user registration number 1 to 7 Select the user number to be set On Off Set whether or not to enable the key login function for the selected user Even if the user name and other parameters below are specified the login function cannot be used if it is turned Off here On Enable the key login function for the selected user Off Disable the key login function for the selected user 10 8 10 6 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode 6 User name Enter the user name up to 16 alphanumeric characters Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 7 UserID Enter the user ID up to 4 alphanumeric characters Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 8 Password Enter the password up to 6 alphanumeric characters Pressing the Input soft key or one of the charac
125. ISP ENTER displays the screen menu 2 Select INFORMATION using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select ALARM SUMMARY MESSAGE SUMMARY or MEMORY SUMMARY using the up and down arrow keys Her INFOR ALARM SUMMARY Hers INFOR AA laLeRt surmary m e MFOR tis fips iy 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without displaying the screen press the ESC key za INFOR 9 MATION MESSAGE SUMMARY p MEMORY SUMMARY 4 14 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Alarm Summary Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Procedure 828 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 62 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2808 62 39 09 Jan 1 2008 82 39 20 TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2008 82 38 21 Jan 01 2800 82 38 46 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2008 82 37 50 Jan 1 2008 2 38 10 Cursor mb TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2808 82 37 19 Jan 01 280A 82 37 39 Up and down arrow TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2008 02 36 48 Jan 01 2000 82 37 88 keys an besed to TAG 83 21 Jan B1 2808 82 36 17 Jan B1 280A 82 36 37 Y TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2808 02 35 46 Jan 01 2800 82 36 06 isa dae ag TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 35 15 Jan 81 2808 82 35 35 5 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 34 44 Jan 1 2008 02 35 84 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2008 82 34 13 Jan 1 2
126. Is the power supplied properly voltage and frequency g q y See section 14 7 YES Is the fuse blown No ontact youi nparest Sales YES Replace the fuse See section 13 2 YES Does the fuse stay intact NO Contact your nearest Sales amp when the power is turned on again Service Center YES Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center 12 8 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart The reading error is large The digital indication or trend trace waveform is unstable The trend trace waveform stays at 0 or 100 Does the input meet the specifications signal source resistance etc NO YES Are the span and NO range settings correct YES Is the input free of noise NO YES Is the environmental temperature kept constant for temperature measurement NO YES Is the input wiring correct NO YES Is the input wiring parallel YES with other equipment NO Is the RJC setting correct NO for TC input YES Contact your nearest Sales amp Service Center Change the input to meet the specifications See section 14 1 Adjust the span and range See sections 5 1 to 5 7 Separate the input wiring from the noise source Ground the recorder properly Ground the measuring object properly Insulate the TC from the measured object Use shielded cable for input Correct the A D
127. JOAO 7 1 5 Alarm Function Alarm hysteresis This applies to upper and lower limit alarms on measurement channels A width hysteresis can be specified on the value used to set or release the alarm This prevents the alarm from being set or released repetitively when the measured value is fluctuating around the alarm value The hysteresis is fixed to 0 5 of the display span display scale if the range is set to Scale The initial setting is ON Upper Limit Alarm H Alarm occurrence Alarm set point 1V Hysteresis approx 0 5 Alarm release Measured value Lower Limit Alarm L Alarm release Measured value 1V Hysteresis approx 0 5 L Alarm set point Alarm occurrence Alarm output relay If you are using a model with the optional alarm output relay AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 or A5 a contact signal can be generated according to the alarm conditions For the procedure related to setting the alarm output relay see section 6 2 Alarm Setting The following functions can be specified on the alarm output relay For details see section 6 4 e When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay notify the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay operation reflash alarm function e When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay operate the relay when all specified alarms are active AND function Energize or de energize t
128. MV220 and RD MV230 For the setting procedure see section 5 9 Model Integration Time of the A D Converter RD MV204 RD MV208 Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz or auto Automatically switches between 16 7 ms and 20 ms Fixed to 20 ms on 12 VDC power supply model RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz 100 ms or auto Automatically switches between 16 7 ms and 20 ms Fixed to 20 ms on 12 VDC power supply model 1 4 1 3 Display Function Common Items Related to the Display 10 4 TFT Color LCD and the Screen Configuration The RD MV200 has a 10 4 TFT color LCD 480 by 640 dot resolution The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section 1 658 rpm o Status display section TAG 06 Data display section 1 797 e Status Display Section Displays the displayed screen name date and time internal memory external storage medium usage condition alarm condition key lock user name key login function and computation condition option For details see section 4 2 Data Display Section Displays the operation screen such as the trend display digital display and bar graph display of the measured and computed data as well as alarm message and file information e Displays the setup screen for the setting and basic setting modes when the RD MV200 is being conf
129. Measured value Blue color Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type measured value Displayed in red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type Not displayed Measured value Blue Alarm indication in the digital display TAG 02 Alarm mark i H 1 363 When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work Measured value Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark measured values All red Released Alarm mark Green Measured value Blue Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Measured value Red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Measured value Blue When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work 6 2 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Alarm indication in the bar graph display TAG B4 Alarm mark 2 000 Alarm point mark 2 000 E myI 8 209 Measured value Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Alarm mark alarm point mark and measured values All red Released Alarm mark Green Alarm point mark Green Measured value Blue Hold Activated Alarm mark Blinks in red Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm poin
130. Mode Time Enter the current time 3 7 User key Action assignment 10 2 Key lock 10 4 Use Not use key lock Password Keys to lock enable disable the key lock Key login 10 6 e Use Not use key login e Auto logout On Off Use Not use user ID User name User ID e Password Allow Prohibit basic setting mode Remote control option 10 9 e Action assignment on remote terminals Report option 11 13 e Report types Date Time of creation e Report channel assignments e Sum unit Display language 10 10 e Select the display language Daylight savings 10 14 e Date Time to switch Temperature 10 15 Temperature unit 3 13 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNY S 1edg JO SEWeN 7 3 5 Configuring the Functions File management and data clearing Operations related to the internal memory Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Initialization of settings data clearing e Clear measured computed data in the internal memory 9 7 e Initialize settings basic setting mode setting mode and clear measured computed data in the internal memory 9 8 Management of files on the external storage media Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode File management e Save setup data 9 1 Load setup data 9 1 Save measured data with key operation 9 2 Load display display data 9 3 Load display event data 9 4 List fi
131. NG Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent fire use wires with cross sectional area of 0 3 mm 22 AWG or more Connecting procedure 1 Check that the power switch is turned off 2 Connect the accessory DC power terminal connector part No A1105JC to the power wire and the RD MV200 Use a power wire with a cross sectional area of 0 3 mm 22 AWG or more Soldering A 40 VDC 10 to 18 VDC Rated supply voltage 12 VDC Operating supply voltage 10 to 18 VDC Power consumption About 42 VA max 2 16 Chapter 3 Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions Front Panel r E 7 8 910111213 14 10 11 12 2R gt v Carrying handle LCD screen Displays various operation screens such as the trend display and the setup screen to configure the RD MV200 Power switch Used to turn the power ON OFF Fuse Four feet and two folding front feet Standing on the front feet the RD MV200 can be inclined backwards up to 10 degrees Fuse cover Character number input key Used when entering characters and numbers USER key Executes the action assigned to this key STOP key Used to stop the data acquisition to the internal memory It also stops the updating of the waveform on the trend display If the model has the optional computation function M1 the re
132. OM OMEGA S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT IN ORDER TO AVOID PROCESSING DELAYS The assigned AR number should then be marked on the outside of the return package and on any correspondence The purchaser is responsible for shipping charges freight insurance and proper packaging to prevent breakage in transit FOR WARRANTY RETURNS please have the FOR NON WARRANTY REPAIRS consult OMEGA following information available BEFORE for current repair charges Have the following contacting OMEGA information available BEFORE contacting OMEGA 1 Purchase Order number under which the product 1 Purchase Order number to cover the COST was PURCHASED of the repair 2 Model and serial number of the product under 2 Model and serial number of the product and warranty and 3 Repair instructions and or specific problems 3 Repair instructions and or specific problems relative to the product relative to the product OMEGA s policy is to make running changes not model changes whenever an improvement is possible This affords our customers the latest in technology and engineering OMEGA is a registered trademark of OMEGA ENGINEERING INC Copyright 2000 OMEGA ENGINEERING INC All rights reserved This document may not be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form in whole or in part without the prior written consent of OMEGA ENGINEERING INC Where Do Find Everything Need for P
133. Press 2 soft key to display the Load settings screen rLoad settings File name Time TEST PNL 2000 01 01 82 85 1 A list of setup files in the storage medium appears Select the file to be loaded The extension of setup files is PNL To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to load the file After loading the screen returns to the operation mode The loaded setup data take effect Note If the loaded data does not take effect refer to the error log For the procedure related to displaying the error log see section 10 7 9 2 9 1 Saving loading setup data Saving setup data in the basic setting mode Procedure Saves the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode to the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the setting mode These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press w Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press soft key to display the Save settings screen pm File name Time E 1 Enter the name of the setup data file to be saved Pressing the Input soft key or one of t
134. Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 3 Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to delete all the files in the directory All files are cleared from the file list To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Note If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu Deleting a directory A directory can be deleted if there are no files in the directory To delete a directory that has files delete all the files in the directory first 1 Of the directories listed in the Directory name frame select the directory you wish to delete using the up and down arrow keys Check that no files are displayed in the File name frame is the root directory The root directory cannot be deleted 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation dialog box 3 Use the arrow keys to select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to delete the directory The directory name is cleared from the Directory name frame To cancel the delete operation select No and press the DISP ENTER key Note If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu 9 10 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Formatting the external storage medium in the setting mode Procedure Explanation F
135. Red Green Blue B violet See section 14 2 for initial settings Brown Orange Y green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Zone Lower ifto 95 Numerical value Upper 5 tofioo Graph Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 mo m 12 Bar graph Normal Center Scale position 1 2 j2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Off Partial On Off On Expand 1 to 99 Numerical value Boundary View Direction Trend Bar graph Background Trend line 1 3 Trip line 1 3 Grid 4 5 6 7 8 9 oo 12 Scroll 5s Jos 20s 30s 1 min LCD Brightness 1 200 3 4 Backlight saver On Off On Off O e Saver time 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min somn fn Restore Key Math color CH31 to CH60 Red Green Blue B violet See section 14 2 for initial settings Brown Orange Y green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Lightgray Purple Math Zone Lower fto 95 Numerical value Upper 5 tofi00 Math partial On Off On Expand 1 to 99 Numerical value Boundary App 2 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial Settings Parameters Menu Notes Math Graph Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 ott 12 Bar graph Normal Center Scale position 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 Off Save Load Save settings Clear data Load settings Save data Load display data Load event data File list Delete Format Clear data Time set Numerical value Math set Math range
136. Remote input signal The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger Rising Falling edge Trigger Rising Falling gt 250 ms or more For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the remote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high suonun4 19410 2 10 15 10 10 Setting the Displayed Language Basic Setting Mode Procedure Explanation Select the language that is used on the screen The language setting applies to all modes operation mode setting mode and basic setting mode The initial setting is English e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press rew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears AUX Tag Channel Channel Henory alarm th Language English 1 Partial Use The numbers in front of the
137. SENTATIONS OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EXCEPT THAT OF TITLE AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The remedies of purchaser set forth herein are exclusive and the total liability of OMEGA with respect to this order whether based on contract warranty negligence indemnification strict liability or otherwise shall not exceed the purchase price of the component upon which liability is based In no event shall OMEGA be liable for consequential incidental or special damages CONDITIONS Equipment sold by OMEGA is not intended to be used nor shall it be used 1 as a Basic Component under 10 CFR 21 NRC used in or with any nuclear installation or activity or 2 in medical applications or used on humans Should any Product s be used in or with any nuclear installation or activity medical application used on humans or misused in any way OMEGA assumes no responsibility as set forth in our basic WARRANTY DISCLAIMER language and additionally purchaser will indemnify OMEGA and hold OMEGA harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of the use of the Product s in such a manner RETURN REQUESTS INQUIRIES Direct all warranty and repair requests inquiries to the OMEGA Customer Service Department BEFORE RETURNING ANY PRODUCT S TO OMEGA PURCHASER MUST OBTAIN AN AUTHORIZED RETURN AR NUMBER FR
138. SER key The instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are stored to the internal memory Note The manual sampling can also be carried out via remote control or communication commands 8 26 Chapter 9 Managing Files and Initializing Data 9 1 Saving loading setup data You can save the setup data to or load setup data from the external storage medium The operation can be carried out in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode A setup data file has approximately 25 KB in size maximum Saving setup data in the setting mode Saves the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic setting mode to the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press Press File name E settings 5 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen 1 soft key to display the Save settings screen Note File nane Tine pi Enter the name of the setup data file to be saved Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 8 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER
139. Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key User key Action ra 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Action Selecting the action to be assigned Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Actions that can be assigned The initial setting is AlarmACK Soft Key Ref section Action None No operation Trigger 8 6 Provides a key trigger for starting acquiring the event data when Key Trigger is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data see section 8 11 AlarmACK 6 1 Release alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold see section 6 4 Math 11 3 Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 is equipped Math rst 11 3 Clears computed results when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation is suspended M sample 8 12 Stores instantaneous values of all channels to theinternal memory Message 1 to 8 7 4 Displays messages and stores them to the intern
140. Set together by Math parameter 2 Set together by Write memory parameter 1 29 1 8 Other Functions Key Login Logout Log Display System Screen This function allows only certain users to access the RD MV200 The users are distinguished by their name user IDs and passwords You can select whether or not to use user IDs In addition you can set whether or not to allow operations in the basic setting mode for each user Up to 7 users can be registered For the setting and operating procedure see section 10 6 and 10 5 respectively A list of phenomena that occurred can be displayed in the order of occurrence for the following items e Error messages 50 most recent messages A log of key login and logout 50 most recent logins and logouts A log of communication commands 200 most recent commands A log of file transfers using the FTP client function 50 most recent transfers For details related to the display format see section 10 7 Error log example Displays the date and time of the error occurrence error code number and the message The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs Date and time of occurrence Error code Error message 885 085 Time No Hessage Jan 12 2088 68 36 47 281 Not enough free space on media Jan 12 2088 08 36 19 218 Media has not been inserted Jan 11 2088 04 15 38 885 The input numerical value exc
141. TAL OFF using the up and down keys The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu 4 9 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens H DIGITAL OFF 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays clears the numerical section To close the menu without displaying clearing the numerical section press the ESC key Switching the trend digital and bar graph screens The following two methods are available e Switch between trend digital and bar graph from the screen menu The operating procedure is the same as Displaying the screen on page 4 5 e Switching the trend digital and bar graph screens using the arrow keys 1 The displayed screen changes in the order trend digital bar graph trend and so on by pressing the down arrow key on the trend digital and bar graph screens 2 By pressing the up arrow key the displayed screen changes in the reverse order Starting the waveform display of the trend display stopping the waveform update The operation procedure used to start the waveform display of the trend display and the procedure used to stop the waveform update are the same as the operation used to start stop the data acquisition to the internal memory When the data are being acquired to the internal memory the waveform is displayed When it is stopped the waveform is not updated For the operating procedure see sections 8 5 and 8 6 Note Trend screen when the acquired data type is set to Event on
142. a file Mddhhmma DTG Hourly report data file Mddhhmma DHR Daily report data file Mddhhmma DDR Weekly report data file Mddhhmma DWR Monthly report data file Mddhhmma DMR where M month 1 to 9 X 10 Y 11 Z 12 dd date hh hour mm minute a sequence number Note The sequence number of the file name is normally set to 0 However if the display data acquisition is started stopped and restarted within one minute for example then the file name of the two files will have sequence numbers 0 and 1 for the first and second files respectively The two files will have the same Mddhhmm month day hour minute section 8 2 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data The display and event data are acquired by specifying the channels sampling interval file size and other information Specifying the data to be acquired Data type Display data and event data Specify the type of data to be acquired depending on the application Several examples are shown below Please use them as references Example 1 Continuously record the waveform data as in the conventional chart type recorders Select display data only Example 2 Continuously record the waveform data and when an alarm occurs record detailed data around the alarm incident Select display data and event data For the event data select Trigger or Rotate for the mode Specify the trigger used to start the event data acqu
143. a ou eee e cree e cena 8 3 Function to Acquire Other Datta iiicsscvccsnsssenssveescsavsnesecsitastadsiescvacneedversusetiassevedevsieaccns 8 9 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium 8 10 ACQUINING Display DALE sis aies cocicesesnacphet tact ssccas terachiacuersasactts suas vissassascseaeclskiatiseccincateAtaceas 8 12 Acquiring Event Data scccccccscsecsscisttcacesecectesey cccasetcacs ceceasesacesescecses decnsctannssinsderserseandznaaes 8 13 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium 8 15 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data 00 eee ece eee ee eee 8 18 Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Saved Data during Manual Save 8 20 Setting the Channels to Display the Trend and Acquire the Data Basic Setting Mode 8 22 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode 8 23 Storing Measured Computed Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sampling 00 8 26 Contents Chapter 9 Managing Files and Initializing Data 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 Savi g loading Setup Gata wees escrseeieseicaereieee es ameiendenniieasel yvineeiee iid 9 1 Saving data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operation 9 5 Viewing Display Data in the External Storage Medium ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeneeteneeteneeeaes Viewing Event Data in the Exte
144. above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to Volt 3 Range Set the input range 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value 5 1 sBuinjes jeuueyo jusweinseayy 7 5 1 Voltage Input Setting Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Measurable range The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Range Volt 20 mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 00 to 20 00 V DC current input An external shunt resistor is connected to the input terminal to convert a current signal to a voltage signal The shunt resistors in the following table can be provided A 250 Q shunt resistor for example is used to convert a 4
145. actors should be considered when determining the actual replacement period 13 5 soUueUD UIe 2 Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 Input Specifications Input terminal Clamped input terminal or screw input terminal Number of Inputs RD MV204 four channels RD MV208 eight channels RD MV210 ten channels RD MV220 twenty channels RD MV230 thirty channels Scan Interval RD MV204 RD MV208 125 ms or 250 ms RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 1sor2s 2s when an A D integration time is set to 100 ms Inputs Volt DC voltage TC thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector DI digital input DC current with external shunt resistor attached Input type Measuring range 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2 000 to 2 000 V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 00 to 20 00 V 0 0 to 1760 C 32 to 3200 F 0 0 to 1760 C 32 to 3200 F 0 0 to 1820 C 32 to 3308 F 200 0 to 1370 C 328 to 2498 F 200 0 to 800 C _ 328 0 to 1472 0 F 200 0 to 1100 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F 200 0 to 400 C _ 328 0 to 752 0 F 0 0 to 1300 C 32 to 2372 F 0 0 to 2315 C 32 to 4199 F 200 0 to 900 C 328 0 to 1652 0 F 200 0 to 400 C 328 0 to 752 0 F o 600 C 328 0 to 1112 0 F JPt100 4 0 550 C 328 0 to 1022 0 F DCV input OFF less than 2 4 V TTL ON more than 2 4 V Contact input Contact ON OFF 1 R S B K E J T N 1EC584 1 1995 DIN IEC584 JIS 1602 1995
146. age medium while data acquisition or computation is in progress Explanation Name of the directory to which to save the data EE the specified name Axx where The name of the directory to which to save the data is xx is the sequence number Each time carrying out the key operation and the data are saved the sequence number of the directory name increments by one Example When the specified directory name is DATAO the first set of data are saved to DATAO A00 and the second set of data are saved to DATAO A01 eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue sayi4 Buibeuew 9 5 9 3 Viewing Display Data in the External Storage Medium Procedure Loads the display data saved in the external storage medium and displays the waveform on the historical trend screen This operation can be carried out when the acquisition of display data is set Display or E D in section 8 11 See section 4 6 for the use of the historical trend These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press ew Press 6 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen soft key to display the Load data screen r Load display data Directory name File name Time 7 10401538 DDS 2000701784 01 56 DATAZ3 10402008 DDS 2000 01 04 42 03 18482050 DDS 20007 01704 82 06 et 10482200
147. al memory Snapshot 9 6 Save the screen image data to the storage medium Snapshot works in all modes Other actions work in the operation mode or the setting mode 10 2 10 3 Using Key Lock Procedure Key lock is a function used to prevent key operations Zip disk removal and saving data to the external storage medium in the manual save mode To release a key lock you must enter a password The key lock ON OFF condition is retained even if the power is turned OFF Thus the next time the power is turned ON the preexisting state is restored Key lock is set in the basic setting mode Enabling key lock This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Keylock soft key The key lock function is enabled Note If a locked key is pressed when the key lock function is engaged a message This key is locked is displayed e When manual save is specified and the key lock function for the external storage medium is engaged the data cannot be saved to the external storage medium even if the external storage medium is inserted into the drive and the front cover is closed e If the key lock function for the external storage medium is engaged when using a Zip disk the disk cannot be ejected even if the eject button is pressed A key lock icon appears in the status display section when the key lock is enabled See section 4 2 Releasing th
148. al Storage Medium 8 1 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved Data Types and File Names Data type The types and the contents of the data that are acquired are as follows Beside those data listed below the setup data see section 9 1 and the screen image data see section 9 6 can be saved to the external storage medium Type Content Display data Waveform data that are used to display trends on the LCD screen The maximum and minimum values from measured computed data within the sampling intervals are held A header string can be written into the display data file a character string that is common to all data files Alarm and message information is held Data format Binary format Event data G The instantaneous values of the measured computed data are acquired at the specified sampling interval There is a mode in which the data acquisition is started when a trigger occurs or another mode in which the data acquisition is started when the START key is pressed The header string can be written into the event data file a character string that is common to all data files Alarm and message is held Data format Binary format Manual sampled data Every time a key that executes manual sampling is pressed measured computed data instantaneous values of all channels at that point are acquired Up to 50 samples of data can be stored in the internal memory The header string can be written into the manual s
149. alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Delay lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period 11 14 11 6 Setting Constants Procedure Explanation Total of 30 constants KO1 to K30 can be defined These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key a7 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Constant Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 E soft keys Us
150. ale Bar graph _ Unit __ 2 008 72 88 721088 77 288 7288 fr a Lower limit of span Measured 8 749 8 243 8 278 8 781 1 231 1 597 computed value 1 9 suonoun4 JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 3 Display Function Overview Screen Updating of the Bar Graph and the Numerical Display Measured computed values and bar graphs are updated every second However when the scan interval on the RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed Information Description Display direction The bar graphs can be displayed horizontally or vertically gt Section 7 13 Base position When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the starting point of the bar base position can be set to the minimum edge of the measurement scale or to the center position Section 7 10 Displayed color The displayed color of the channels are common with the trend display Section 7 8 Scale display The number of divisions of the scale can be set to a value in the range 4 to 12 Section 7 10 common with the trend display A list of measured computed values and alarm conditions of all measurement computation channels is displayed You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend or bar graph of the group containing the selected channel For the procedure used to dis
151. ampled data file Data format eee App 7 manual sampling remote Control 10 14 manual save 1 21 8 10 MANK a ieccctenseneccsenneencevsnrouccesenenctectunececauaaeeaccapavencecateyeeescanaye 6 4 maximum number of data points per channel 08 8 7 measurable range DC Volt oo cece eee eee renee 5 2 measurable range DI sa measurable range difference computation 2 5 8 measurable range RID sirisser senienas sassone 5 4 measurable range TC measurement Channels issii isana a 1 2 MEDIA KOY sree ae memory information m mory SUMMATY veies seseirins seesi scescasnes caceneeeseeinbacneceens MENU OY sssccccetcsteccsas ntact sce eened iinun ikia ani iaka a aa message message string message summary MOIE ear E E EE TEO eA EE monthly report sacs vesccatises ceeeenvnsestnveveds eaeedein aan SEEE 11 23 MOVING KEMASI eLo e EE cd ende eeteanneeeee neta 1 4 N normal TOPMALLIMNG eoira aieas 9 11 number OF ala M Siira 1 22 number of data bytes per channel number of display data files number of event data files sirieni 8 4 numerical display report eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeees 11 25 numerical display SECTION ssassn 1 8 O operation Modenesi a vannweedveenesaees 3 7 operation SCCM sariri ainarra rnan te draia aran 4 1 option terminals ze order of precedence of the operators eeeeeee 11 2 over display range Computation
152. ampled data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format ASCII format TLOG data option e TLOG data are statistical computation data Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory The header string can be written into the TLOG data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format Binary format Report data option Consists of hourly daily weekly and monthly reports Data are computed at intervals depending on the report type one hour for hourly report one day for daily report etc Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period Up to 40 reports can be stored in the internal memory Each report file can contain up to 12 measured computed channels of report data The header string can be written into the report data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format ASCII format 8 1 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uonisinboy eead e 8 1 Data Types to be Acquired and Saved File name File names are automatically assigned month day hour minute of the first sampled data sequence number extension for display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option Display data file Mddhhmma DDS Event data file Mddhhmma DEV Manual sampled data file Mddhhmma DMN TLOG dat
153. ange occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs Positive negative computation overflow in computation channels Positive computation overflow occurs when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 Negative computation overflow occurs when the value falls below 3 4E 38 Output value when detected erroneous data measurement over range data or computation overflow data Channels Data Output value Measurement channels measurement error Blank positive over range 99999 negative over range 99999 Computation channels computation error 999999999 positive computation overflow 999999999 negative computation overflow 99999999 CH TAG and UNIT lines In the following cases both the CH TAG line and the UNIT line are rewritten after a carriage return line feed and followed by manual sampled data e When the measurement channel is switched from some setting other than Skip to Skip e When the measurement channel is switched from Skip to some other setting e When the computation channels are turned On or turned Off e When the
154. anged Data size e Size of the header section The following equation can be used to derive the size of the header section Title carriage return line feed serial number carriage return line feed file header carriage return line feed channel tag 8 19 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed unit 6 9 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed The size of the title varies depending on the report type as follows e For hourly reports HOURLY 45 bytes e For daily reports DAILY 44 bytes For weekly reports WEEKLY 45 bytes For monthly reports MONTHLY 46 bytes The size of the serial number is fixed to 38 bytes The size of the file header is fixed to 49 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Monthly data for 30 channels 46 2 38 2 49 2 8 19 x 30 2 6 9 x 30 2 997 bytes xipueddy z App 9 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Size of the data section of one report data set The following equation can be used to derive the size of data section of one report data Carriage return line feed date and time of creation status 11 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed average value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed maximum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed m
155. annels Group Number RD MV204 RD MV208 RD MV210 1 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 2 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 3 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 4 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Group Number RD MV220 RD MV230 1 2 3 4 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Aejdsiq oy Buneiado pue Huas 7 7 Setting the Trip Line Trend Procedure A line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line can be displayed on the trend display The maximum number of trip lines that can be displayed in one group is four e The position of the trip line is specified as a percentage of the display span e You can specify the thickness of the trip lines See section 7 13 e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to
156. ar on the screen while using the RD MV200 The entire list of messages is given below Error codes and messages related to communications are also listed here The messages are displayed in the language that you have chosen For the procedures regarding language selection see section 10 10 However the following messages are displayed only in English messages displayed on the error log screen messages corresponding to communication commands Errors Related to Parameter Settings e Setting Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 1 System error Contact your Omega 2 Incorrect date or time setting See section 3 7 3 A disabled channel is selected See Communication Interface User s Manual 4 Incorrect function parameter See Communication Interface User s Manual 5 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Enter a proper value 6 Incorrect input character string Enter a proper character string 7 Too many characters Enter specified number of characters 8 Incorrect input mode See Communication Interface User s Manual 9 Incorrect input range code See Communication Interface User s Manual 21 Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel See Communication Interface User s Manual 22 The upper and lower span limits are equal See sections 5 1 to 5 7 23 The upper and lower scale lim
157. are displayed These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Oox Memory and Trend Neas CH Math CH teas CH imme f First CH Last CH Jar Jat On Off DE 3 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Meas CH Math CH To set the measurement channels select Meas CH To set the computation channels select Math CH Math CH appears only on models with the computation option M1 2 First channel and last channel Select the desired channel numbers 3 On Off On Display the trend acquire data Off Do not display the trend do not acquire data The initial setting is On for all channels Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The number of measurement and computation channels available in the d
158. arm type you must set the alarm delay period See section 6 3 4 Value Enter the value at which the alarm is activated Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 5 Relay On Off Set whether or not to activate the output relay On Off When turned ON the output relay number box appears 6 Number Set the output relay number For the correspondence between the output relay number and the output relay position see section 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring Option When the alarm output relay option is not installed these settings are void Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Alarm type The following eight types of alarm type are available Name Symbol Description Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Lower limit alarm E An alarm occurs when the measured value becomes smaller than or equal to below the alarm value Difference upper limit alarm h An alarm occurs when the difference betwe
159. asic Setting Mode Procedure Set whether or not to use the partial expanded display e The initial value is Not e The display specifications of the partial expanded display are set in the setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press MENU Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooa AUX Tag Channel Channel Henory alarm 1h Language English Partial m The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Partial Select Use or Not Use Partial expanded display can be set in the setting mode Not Partial expanded display cannot be set Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 22 7 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll time Procedure The display dir
160. ating procedure see section 4 5 e Display from the memory summary For the operating procedure see section 4 5 e Recall from the screen menu For the operating procedure see section 4 6 e For methods used to display the historical trend of display data or event data in the external storage medium see section 9 3 and 9 4 Information displayed on the historical trend The displayed information shown below is common to the historical trend of display data and event data Zoom factor of the time axis Time axis Tag Channel no Maximum and minimum The background color is the opposite value at the display reference position of the trend display black or white Maximum and minimum value over the entire display range TAG IL 0 551 2 000 8 584 2 000 amp Unit 8 034 2 000 0 869 2 000 LZH TAG 83 6 483 2 000 6 449 2 000 cm 9 969 2 088 6 938 2 000 B ne Bd Ld sz 1 389 63 2 008 pH Screen switch display 1 714 2 000 1 696 2 000 Display reference position the right end of the display Date and time at the display range the position of the newest data being displayed reference position Date and time at the display reference position 1 3 Display Function e The waveform can be scrolled along the time axis using the arrow keys The time axis can be expanded or reduced The entire data of the file that is being displayed on the historical trend can be displ
161. ay of trend digital and bar graph displays The numerical display of trend digital and bar graph displays and the bar graph display are updated at all times when they are displayed Itis not affected by whether or not the waveform of the trend display is shown The waveform of the trend display is updated at the display update rate For the procedure related to setting the display update rate see section 7 3 Setting the Display Update Rate Trend For the procedure related to setting the channel to display the trend and to store the data see section 8 10 For the procedure used to assign channels to groups see section 7 6 Alarm indication Alarms are checked at all times and displayed on the relevant displays regardless of whether or not the waveform of the trend display is shown Alarms are displayed using alarm type symbols For details related to the alarms see section 6 2 Name Symbol Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Difference upper limit alarm Difference lower limit alarm Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm Delay upper limit alarm Delay lower limit alarm 4507r Display position If the number of channels assigned to a group is greater than or equal to seven the alarm indicator position on the trend digital and bar graph displays is different from the screen example in the previous pages su 195 uopes do HulyIMS gt 4 4 Using the
162. ayed at the top section of the screen right section if the trend display is vertical You can specify the position to be displayed on the historical trend display using a cursor The specified position becomes the display reference position All data display Cursor TAG B1 8 551 2 000 8 584 2 000 ne 8 483 2 0 to oo E ys 1 714 2 888 1698 2 000 HetlS1 23 26 pee Ht 23 g Display reference position e The memory information of the file being displayed on the historical trend can be displayed File name and data type Serial number of the instrument that sampled the data Start stop time and user name user name is displayed only when the key login function is used Half screen display only when displaying the historical trend of the display data Displays the historical trend of the display data on the left half of the screen lower half if the trend is vertical and the current display data on the right half of the screen upper half if the trend is vertical Historical trend display data only Current trend Current trend information SUONJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 3 Display Function Setting Screen The various functions of the RD MV200 are configured using the setting mode or the basic setting mode Setting mode screen This screen is used to set the input range filter moving average alarm group channel display color etc For details see section 3 5
163. ayed in a list By scrolling the screen using arrow keys up to 100 incidents can be displayed By selecting a message from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the message can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of the message displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was written 006 086 Hessage Time User Name HESSAGES Jan 04 2688 02 24 59 user POWER OFF Jan 04 2888 82 24 53 userl Cursor mp HESSAGES Jan 04 2688 62 24 06 userl HESSAGE4 Jan 04 2688 62 24 08 userl POWER ON Jan 04 2688 62 21 03 useri HESSAGE1 Jan 4 2088 62 28 59 userl Y The historical trend of the data containing the selected Inin N 9 551 A div 0 584 8 034 8 969 1 12 1 3 Display Function Memory Summary The information pertaining to the display data file and event data file in the internal memory is displayed Display data correspond to the data on the trend display Event data are data acquired to the internal memory according to the specified sampling interval and data collection period The data are separate from the display data In addition the number of manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data option residing in the interna
164. ayed under Time div Auto save interval is the interval at which the display data residing in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium The selectable values for Auto save interval vary depending on the Time div setting For the setting procedure see section 8 8 The display data sampling interval and the speed of movement of waveforms along the time axis The following table shows the display update rate display data sampling interval and the speed of movement of waveforms along the time axis Display update rate 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h DIV Display data 05 1 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 sampling interval s Speed of movement 2376 1188 594 297 119 59 30 20 10 5 2 5 of wave forms Estimated value mm h for RD MV204 and RD MV208 only 7 3 Aejdsig oy Buneiado pue Huas 7 4 Using Message Strings Trend Procedure Arbitrary character strings can be registered They can be displayed on the trend display or stored along with the display event data e Number of messages 8 e Number of characters Up to 16 alphanumeric characters A list of messages can be displayed on the message summary screen See section 4 5 For models with the batch function BT1 option messages 1 2 and 3 can be altered from the operation screen to be used Displaying a message on the trend display Writing a message to the internal memory e Operation using the FUNC key
165. bar indicating the pretrigger data in the status display section is displayed in orange 2 When the trigger occurs data acquisition starts Providing the key trigger that starts the data acquisition to the internal memory This operation is carried out in the trigger wait state For all other cases this operation produces no effect For details related to triggers other than the key trigger see section sections 8 2 or 8 11 Operation using the FUNC key 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Trigger soft key to start the data acquisition of the event data to the internal memory Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out only when the key trigger function is assigned to the USER key 1 Press the USER key to start the data acquisition of the event data to the internal memory Stop data acquisition Data acquisition stops upon reaching the specified time data length see section 8 11 In the status display section the block to which data were stored turns green See section 4 2 Note During the Trigger mode Full is displayed when data acquisition to all blocks is complete When Full is displayed event data are no longer acquired even if the trigger condition is met In this case save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Terminate data acquisition with a key operation in sync with the termination of the display data acquisition when acquiring t
166. be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key ws 1 eT First CH Last CH Eg EJ r Tag Alarm Delay Tag J Time s Pou Timer No 1 Sum scale Off Rolling average On Off of 2 Interval 18s 3 Number of samples T 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Tag TLOG and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set 2 On Off On Use rolling average Off Do not use rolling average If On is selected Interval and Number of samples are displayed 3 Interval Select the interval from the selections below However when the scan interval is set to 2 s even if the sampling interval is set to 1 s 3 s 5 s or 15 s the sampling will be performed at 2 s 4 s 6 s or 16 s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 10s 12s 15s 20 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 4 Number of samples This is the number of data points used to compute the rolling average Set an integer value between 1 and 64
167. ble e RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 1 2 5 10 20 30 min 1 2 4 hours div selectable Numerical value 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Waveform Numerical value numerical display section can be turned ON OFF scale scale display can be turned ON OFF grid lines number of divisions selectable from 4 to 12 hours minutes on time axis trip lines line widths are selectable from 1 2 and 3 dots messages up to eight different messages of up to 16 characters for each alarm indication Zone display and partial expanded display are available Vertical or horizontal selectable 10 channels per screen maximum 4 to 12 divisions selectable suonesiioeds display Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Bar graph numerical value unit scale alarm indication 14 3 14 2 Display Specifications Digital screen Number of indication channels 10 channels per screen maximum Number of screens 4 screens 4 group Display update rate 1 s 2s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Numerical value unit alarm indication Automatic display switching Overview screen Information screen Tags Historical trend screen Log display System screen Backlight saver function Display language Temperature unit The displayed group can be automatically changed on the trend digital and bar graph screens The display switching interval
168. block This makes wiring work easier To prevent bad contacts make sure to securely tighten the screws after wiring FAIL output is a de energize relay de energized on Failure and the Memory End output is an energize relay energized on Memory End Contact Specifications The contact specification is the same as that for the alarm output See section 2 4 For details related to the FAIL Memory End output see section 1 8 2 6 Remote Control Wiring R1 Option A Wiring Procedure To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF 1 Turn OFF the RD MV200 and remove the cover for the option terminal Connect the remote control signal wires to the terminal The terminal arrangement for the remote control option is as follows Cis a common terminal for terminals 1 through 8 Terminal Position Option Terminal 1 R1 AR1 AR2 Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the remote control terminals is indicated C is the common terminal REMOTE 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Note The option terminal block itself can be removed by loosening the two screws at the top left and bottom right of the terminal block This makes wiring work easier To prevent bad contacts make sure to securely tighten the screws after wiring Use shielded wires for the remote control wires to reduce the effects of noi
169. c setting mode settings in the setting mode and the internal memory Clear 2 Clears the settings in the setting mode and the internal memory Clear 3 Clears the internal memory 2 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation window Pressing the DISP ENTER key initializes the settings and returns to the operation mode 9 15 eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue sayi4 GBuibeuew fa Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 USER Key An action can be assigned to the user key For details of actions see section 10 2 The alarm ACK function see chapter 6 is assigned as the initial value USER key 1 asc C 3an esr 0 menu eva 4u Gmo 6 Par Con Cr Zsru 8 vwx 9 yz 0 One Gan cre Executing the action that has been assigned Procedure For the operating procedure see sections listed below Assigned function soft key Reference section None Trigger 8 6 AlarmACK 6 1 Math 11 3 Math rst 11 3 M sample 8 12 Message1 to Message8 7 4 Snapshot 9 6 10 1 suonun4 19410 2 10 2 Assigning an Action to the USER Key Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen
170. ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 25 Initial settings basic setting mode cee App 4 initial settings Setting Mode iiras App 1 initializing input specifications remote control eee eee eens 2 12 INPUL TERMINALS ccs issh vee E da eee Mise cate eee 3 3 input type eae 122 installation an2 integration time 1 4 IMtStMal MEMOTY secccescecsccses cessesesvesiesevestancsecasuacnss niini 1 20 interval rate of change alarm c eceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 1 23 K MG rites eneeier na eaters ERr TE Sa EEEE ETS 3 1 key operations basic setting mode i key operations setting mode 3 20 KEY iao lele A A EAT ratte tet A rea 8 5 load the setup data remote control loading setup data basic setting mode cee 9 4 loading setup data Setting mode eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeee 9 2 log communication command 10 11 log error message x 10 10 l g FUP inns log key login logout log display 1 30 logical computation 11 1 l gical format ensani tah ciate niin euieanteas HOUMOMB GY ceived races teea e ter dads taba tatvate lower limit alarm A lower limit on rate of change alarm c eeeeeeeeees 1 23 Index 2 Index Mo MAC addrosSieitoirn EE 1 30 IMAINTOM ANCE ssiri ea 13 1 manager name 1 27 manual sample a826 Manual sampled data sssisiserisnrerreinaisreire 1 21 8 1 manual s
171. channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 100 000 Display data and event data Display data 900 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 120 000 This logic is explained in more detail below When acquiring display data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 20 the number of computing channels is 10 and the display rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval then Number of data per channel 1 200 000 bytes 20 x 4 bytes 10 x 8 bytes 7 500 data Maximum number of data points is 100 000 Sampling length per file 7 500 x 60 s 450 000 s approx 5 days When acquiring event data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 20 the number of computing channels is 10 and the sampling interval is 1 s then Number of data per channel 1 200 000 bytes 20 x 2 bytes 10 x 4 bytes 15 000 data Maximum number of data points is 120 000 Sampling length 15 000 x 1 s 15 000 s approx 4 hours When acquiring both di
172. computation data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min h or day a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 23 11 11 Overview of the Report Function For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the sum unit is set to min then 2s 60s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that is close to the actual input value The scan interval unit is in seconds Off measured value s measured value x scan interval min measured value x scan interval 60 h measured value x scan interval 3600 day measured value x scan interval 86400 For the setting procedure see section 11 13 If power is lost while the report function is in progress If a power disruption occurred while the report function was in progress the report function will resume after the power is restored The exact operation will vary depending on whether the power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create a report Time of Recovery Report Ope
173. cquisition are continued the external storage medium Basic setting mode Setup mode the file on This mode is used to configure the Basic settings of the functions basic environment of the RD MV200 such Operation related to as the input format and the data storage format This mode is entered by pressing the FUNC key for three seconds at the setting mode menu This mode cannot be entered while data acquisition or computation is in progress Operations such as measurements alarm detection and data acquisition are stopped the external storage medium 3 7 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SWEN 7 3 4 Run Mode Functions and Operations in the Operation Mode Operation screen Displays various operation screens such as trend digital bar graph alarm summary message summary memory summary historical trend four screen display and report display option Screens are switched by the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key See chapter 4 Operations using the FUNC key When the FUNC key is pressed the functions that are assigned to the soft keys are displayed The soft key menu varies depending on functions and options in use Press the Next soft key to display the soft key menu in the next line The function is executed by pressing the soft key Press the FUNC or ESC key to erase the menu without executing the assigned function Batch AlarmACK Nessage a Keylock Logout Next 1 3 sample Nath Nath Sav
174. cquisition started Number of data in the file The historical trend of the selected data ae data example SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 3 Display Function Report Data M1 option Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed The report function is used to write the average minimum maximum and sum at specified intervals for the specified channels Reports can be made hourly daily weekly or monthly For details related to the report data see section 1 6 For the operating procedure see section 4 5 The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type Date and time the report started Date and time the report was created Tt Index 2 2 Kind Hourly Start Jan 81 2000 00 10 46 Timeup Jan 01 2000 68 11 86 Channel Unit Ave Hax Hin Sum CHAL v 6 668 6 668 0 000 6 668888E 80 CHB2 v 6 608 6 608 6 000 6 600000E 00 CHB v 8 196 8 964 0 743 3 916000E 00 HA4 v 6 608 6 668 6 008 6 608000E 00 CHES v 6 608 8 888 6 008 6 600000E 00 CHOG v 8 132 8 186 0 026 2 648000E 00 CHO Ki 0 120 0 174 0 012 2 391000E 00 CHEB v 8 110 8 164 0 001 2 202000E 00 CHES v 6 161 6 155 0 007 2 6296800E 00 CHIB v 6 698 8 144 0 018 1 793886E 88 CHIL v 8 286 8 282 8 299 5 718000E 08 CHI2 v 8 293 8 289 0 297 5 867000E 00 CHI3 v 8 381 8 297 0 305 6 029000E 06 CHId v 8 307 0 304 0 311 6 147000E 00 CHI5 v 8 312 0 308
175. creen press the soft key as r Remote No 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Action Assign actions to Remote numbers 1 to 8 For the functions that can be assigned see the explanation suonoun 19410 2 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Actions that can be assigned Enclosed in parentheses are soft key expressions None None No action is assigned 10 13 10 9 Setting the Remote Control Functions R1 Option Basic Setting Mode Starts stops data acquisition StartStop e Remote input Rising start falling stop Start Starts stops the acquisition of the display data and the event data the computation option and the report option Stop Stops the acquisition of the display data and the event data and the report option e If the RD MV200 is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the RD MV200 is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect External trigger for event data acquisition Trigger e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e This becomes the external trigger that starts the acquisition of the event data to the internal memory This is valid onl
176. ctive ground terminal Ny AC ON power O OFF power Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Failure to comply may result in injury or death electric shock hazard Power Supply Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Connecting to the power supply To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire use parts provided by Omega in connecting to the power supply For AC power supply models the power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth terminal Do not invalidate this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth grounding Protective Grounding AC power supply models Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding AC power supply models Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument when the protective grounding or the fuse might be defective Also make sure to check them before operation Fuse To prevent fire only use a fuse that has a rating voltage current and type that is specified by the instrument When replacing a fuse turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord Never short the fuse
177. d Measured data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations If scaling is in effect the scaled values are used in the computation Computed data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations Consiants K01 to K30 The values assigned to K01 to K30 can be used as constants Enter the values as K01 to K30 in the equations Range of constants Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Unit handling Communication input data C01 to C30 Data that have been specified through the communication interface can be used Enter the data as C01 to C30 in the equations For the procedure used to set the data see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 Range of numerical values Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 Conditions of the remote control terminals D01 to D08 The conditions of the remote input signal can be assigned to 1 and 0 and used in the equations Enter the data as D01 to D08 the number following the letter D is the remote terminal number in the equations The correlation between the conditions of the remote input signal and the value 1 and 0 are shown below Type of Status 1 or 0
178. d and the computation is suspended gt Section 11 3 M sample Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory gt Section 8 12 Message 1 to Message 8 Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory gt Section 7 4 Snapshot Saves the screen image data to the external medium gt Section 9 6 Key lock is a function that locks key operations removal of the Zip disk and the saving of data to the external storage medium during manual save mode A password needs to be entered to release the key lock For the setting and operating procedure see section 10 4 and 10 3 respectively Items and behaviors of the key lock can be set individually Item Behavior during Key Lock START key Disabled STOP key Disabled MENU key Disabled USER key Disabled DISP ENTER key Switching operation screens is disabled Alarm ACK soft key Disabled Math Computation Math START soft key Disabled option e Math STOP soft key Disabled option Math reset soft key Disabled option Write memory Message soft key Disabled e Manual sample soft key Disabled Trigger soft key Disabled e Save Display soft key Disabled e Save Event soft key Disabled Media External storage medium During manual save Prevent saving when an external storage medium is inserted Prevent Zip disk removal During auto save Prevent Zip disk removal 1
179. d are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key E 1 D First CH Last CH 31 EE r Tag Alarm Delay Sm me r TLOG Timer No 2 Sum scale Off 3 rRolling average On Off Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First CH and Last CH Select the desired channels For the channels set here the Tag Rolling average and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set 2 Timer No This is the timer specified in the basic setting mode Select 1 2 or 3 3 Sum scale When the channel is computing TLOG SUM select Off s min or h The initial setting is Off You do not have to set this for channels that are not computing TLOG SUM leave it Off Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 11 18 11 9 Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode Procedure Up to three timers can be specified The timers specified here are used to determine the interval for the TLOG computation In addition all the data of measurement and computation channels can be saved at the interval determined by the
180. d disk format ATA flash memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format Format time Type of storage media Quick Normal Note Floppy disk Approx 6 s Approx 1 min 30 s Zip disk Approx 3 s Approx 10 min ATA flash memory card Approx 3 s Approx 1 min 30 s 20MB Approx 5 s Approx 6 min 160MB e eq Bulziyeniuy pue sayi4 BurHeue i 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Deleting files and directories on the external storage medium in the basic setting mode Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the setting mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press soft key to display the Delete screen Delete Directory name File name Time 16168898 DHR 2088 81 81 80 89 18188898 DDS 2888 81 81 80 89 10100168 DHR 2088 81 81 80 16 16188188 DDS 2080 81 01 80 16 16188348 DDS 2000 01 01 80 34 16188348 DEY 2088 81 01 80 34 18188538 DHR 2000 81 81 88 53 18188438 DDS 2000 01 01 80 54 10108438 DEY 2000 01 01 80 54 16188408 DHR 2008 01 01 80 48 18188358 DDS 2000 81 81 80 40 16188538 DEY 2000 81 01 80 54 18188548 DHR 2000 01 01 88 54 10100540 DDS 2000 01
181. data output example in section 4 5 11 24 11 11 Overview of the Report Function Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over range O Negative over range oO Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the input exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over range occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 0 0 Numerical display The range of displayed values of report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the deci
182. data to the internal memory valid only when event data are specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the external trigger is set as the trigger used to start the acquisition Section 8 11 Alarm ACK Trigger Release alarm display relay output valid only when the operation of the alarm display or output relay is set to hold Section 6 4 Time adj Trigger Adjust the internal clock to the nearest hour Computation Math Edge Start stop computation only for models with the computation option M1 Computation Math reset Trigger Reset the computed value of the computation channel reset to 0 only on models with the computation option M1 while the computation is stopped Manual sample Trigger Write the instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory once Load setup data1to3 Trigger Load and activate the setup data file that had been created and stored in the external storage medium Messages 1 to 8 Trigger Display messages 1 to 8 on the trend display and write them to the internal memory Remote signal edge and trigger The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger Rising Falling edge Trigger Rising Falling gt 250 ms or more For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to close and falls when the contact switches from close to
183. details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285 Character String and Details SOCKET Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection BIND Failed the transfer connection command CONNECT Failed the transfer connection LISTEN Failed the transfer connection reception ACCEPT Failed to accept the transfer connection SOCKNAME Internal processing error RECV Failed to receive data over the transfer connection SEND Failed to send data over the transfer connection 286 FTP file transfer error 1 See the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 2 Contact Omega 3 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure Note e The FTP client function on the RD MV200 has a timer function that drops the connection if there is no data transfer for two minutes If the server does not respond within this time period the transfer fails The FTP client function on the RD MV200 overwrites files with the same file names on the server without any warnings unless the server rejects the request For information regarding the FTP client function of the RD MV200 see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 Communication Errors For information regarding the communication function of the RD MV200 see t
184. dition a signal can be output from the relay output terminals on the rear panel of the RD MV200 only on models with the optional alarm output relay function AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 or A5 Alarm indication The alarm conditions are displayed as alarm icons in the status display section and on the trend digital bar graph and overview displays The detailed information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary Alarms are displayed when the alarm conditions are met You can select to clear the alarm when the conditions are no longer met non hold alarm or hold the alarm until it is cleared hold alarm Alarm indication example Overview display and alarm summary display Measured computed value The area corresponding to a channel on which Cursor an alarm is occurring is displayed in red Alarm mark TAG 04 TAG 14 TAG 24 TAG 34 TAG 44 Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel no Alarm no Type Date amp Time Date amp Time alarm occurred alarm released 828 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG a3 21 Jan 81 2088 82 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 39 88 Jan 1 2808 82 39 20 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 38 21 Jan 1 2808 82 38 46 TAG 83 21 Jan 01 2088 82 37 58 Jan 01 2008 82 38 18 Cursor _ TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 37 19 Jan 01 2808 82 37 39 TAG 83 2
185. e For the setting procedure see section 7 13 LCD brightness The brightness of the LCD can be set between four levels The initial setting is 2 For the setting procedure see section 7 14 Backlight saver The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there is no key operation for a certain amount of time The screen returns to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The initial setting is set so that the backlight saver is disabled For the setting procedure see section 7 14 SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 4 Storage Function Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory Display data and event data The measured computed data are first acquired to the RD MV200 s internal memory as two types of data display data and event data Then the data are saved to the external storage medium automatically or when the external storage medium is inserted into the drive You can select whether to save the measured computed data as display data event data or as both The capacity of the internal memory for acquiring display data and event data is 1 2 MB When the measured computed data are saved as both display data and event data 0 9 MB is used to save display data and 0 3 MB is used to save event data RD MV200 ae Internal memory i ee Display data only Event data only Display data and event data 1 2 MB 1 2 MB
186. e Press mew Press the soft key Oom Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key 6 1 First CH Last CH EE Jar p Zone _4 Lower E Upper 1a r ah Division 18 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 Partial On Off fitu 2 Expand 5a 3 Boundary B 488 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Zone and Graph are also simultaneously set 2 On Off When On is selected the Expand and Boundary boxes are displayed On Use the partial expanded display Off Not use the partial expanded display 7 20 7 11 Using Partial Expanded Display Trend 3 Expand Boundary displacement position Set the position to which a particular value the boundary see step 4 in the display span is to be moved as a percentage of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter the position and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 The range for the position 1 to 99 4 Boundary
187. e DIV Sampling 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 40 60 120 240 480 interval s Auto save 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min 10 min interval choices 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 20 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 30 min 1h 1h 1h th th 1h th th 1h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 14 day 14 day 14 day 14 day 14 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day for RD MV204 and RD MV208 only wnp n 6e e10 s jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 9 Setting the File Header Directory Name and the Saved Data during Manual Save Procedure File header Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used to write a header comment to the display data event data manual sample data TLOG data option and report data option Directory name When saving data to the external storage medium you can specify the name of the directory to which the files are to be saved All data other than the setup data display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and screen image data are saved to this directory
188. e minimum value of channel e1 An example of computing equations TLOG MAX 01 K01xSQR 02 Examples of computing equations that are not allowed TLOG AVE 01 TLOG AVE 02 Reason TLOG appears twice in one equation TLOG AVE ABS 01 Reason A computing element is used inside the parentheses Rules for writing an equation common items Follow the rules below in writing the computing equations e Use up to 40 characters to write equations The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses Specify the channels in the equation using channel numbers You can use 01 or 1 for example to specify one digit numbers for channels constants communication input data and conditions of the remote control terminals in equations Example 01 1 KO1 K1 C01 C1 D01 D1 The data value for the channel used in the equation and for all channels greater in number than that channel are substituted with data from the previous scan Do not use more than 16 stacks channel KO1 to K30 C01 to C30 D01 to D08 in one equation Otherwise a computation error may occur The computed result is set to positive overflow displayed as xxxxxxx in this case Example The number of stacks in the equation 01 K01x 03 04xK0O2 is five uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog z 11 3 Using the Computation Function Operations related to the computation function are as follows Start stop computation This ope
189. e Hode fal Span Range Lover Upper Lee a f 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Note First channel and last channel Select the desired channels Mode Set the mode to DI Range Select Level or Cont Contact Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter 0 or 1 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value 5 5 sBuinjes jeuueyo jueweinseoyy 7 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Measurable range The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Range DI Level 0 Less than 2 4 V 1 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V Contact 0 Opened 1 Closed 5 6 5 4 Difference Computation Delta Setting Procedure To measure the difference between the inputs of two channels follow the procedures below to set
190. e This ensures that OMEGA s customers receive maximum coverage on each product If the unit malfunctions it must be returned to the factory for evaluation OMEGA s Customer Service Department will issue an Authorized Return AR number immediately upon phone or written request Upon examination by OMEGA if the unit is found to be defective it will be repaired or replaced at no charge OMEGA s WARRANTY does not apply to defects resulting from any action of the purchaser including but not limited to mishandling improper interfacing operation outside of design limits improper repair or unauthorized modification This WARRANTY is VOID if the unit shows evidence of having been tampered with or shows evidence of having been damaged as a result of excessive corrosion or current heat moisture or vibration improper specification misapplication misuse or other operating conditions outside of OMEGA s control Components which wear are not warranted including but not limited to contact points fuses and triacs OMEGA is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various products However OMEGA neither assumes responsibility for any omissions or errors nor assumes liability for any damages that result from the use of its products in accordance with information provided by OMEGA either verbal or written OMEGA warrants only that the parts manufactured by it will be as specified and free of defects OMEGA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OR REPRE
191. e soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press the soft key 4 Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key BEJ 1 First CH Last CH Jar Jar y Zone Lower Ml 2 Upper 1a 2 _ r rah Division Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 r Partial On Off Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure A First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Graph and Partial are also simultaneously set Zone upper limit and lower limit The waveform is displayed between the Upper and Lower limits The Upper and Lower limits are set as percentages of the display span Lower 0 to 95 Upper 5 to 100 Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 7 13 Aejdsiq oy Buneiado pue Huas 7 9 Using Zone Displays Trend Note Lower must be a smaller value than Upper The width of the zone upper limit
192. e 30 to 60 and channel 3 in the zone 60 to 100 Normal display Zone display 100 100 LANAN A Zones CH3 60 30 CH1 LLL NONA Zone 1 0 0 Explanation regarding the partial expanded display By compressing a section of the display scale of the waveform the remaining section of the display is expanded You specify a value on the display scale boundary value to be moved to another position on the display scale boundary value displacement position In the example shown in the figure below 0 V boundary value is moved to the 30 position of the display scale boundary value displacement position The section below the boundary accounts for 30 of the entire display represents 6 V to 0 V and the section above the boundary accounts for 70 of the entire display represents 0 V to 6 V Measured of full Measured of full value display span value display span 6V 100 6V 100 Expanded portion 0 50 0 30 Compressed portion 6 V z 0 6 V 0 gt 3 div div div 0 1 div div div 3 divs div div 0 1 divs div div Normal Display Partial Expanded Display 1 8 1 3 Display Function Digital Screen Bar graph Screen The measured computed data are displayed using numerical values in large size See section 4 3 TAG 01 1 677 0 4
193. e English German French deg F DST English standard software included Clamped input terminal Screw input terminal Input Terminal 100V AC 240 VAC 12 VDC Power Supply Power Connection D 3 pin inlet A power cord UL T is attached F 3 pin inlet A power cord VDE is attached R 3 pin inlet A power cord SAA is attached S 3 pin inlet A power cord BS is attached Options A1 Alarm output relay 2 relays AR1 Alarm output relay 2 relays remote control A2 Alarm output relay 4 relays AR2 Alarm output relay 4 relays remote control A3 Alarm output relay 6 relays A4 Alarm output relay 12 relays A5 Alarm output relay 24 relays C2 RS 232 interface C3 RS 422 A 485 interface D5 VGA output FA FAIL memory end output relay M1 Computation function report function included Remote control l 2 3 4 5 With an AC adapter A1 AR1 A2 AR2 A3 A4 and A5 cannot be specified simultaneously AR1 AR2 and R1 cannot be specified simultaneously A5 and F1 cannot be specified simultaneously C2 and C3 cannot be specified simultaneously NO Serial No When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the RD MV200 please quote the serial No Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are sup
194. e Manual This User s Manual consists of the following 14 chapters an appendix and an index For information about the communication functions and the standard software see the respective manuals M3643 and M3644 Chapter Title and Contents 1 Overview of Functions Describes the functions of the RD MV200 Before Using the RD MV200 Describes the installation and wiring procedures Names of Parts Run Mode Common Operations Describes the names of each part of the RD MV200 how to use the storage medium drive run mode and common key operations Switching Operation Screens Describes how to use the operation screen such as the trend display and digital display Describes the operations that can be performed using the arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key on the front panel Measurement Channel Settings Describes how to set input specifications such as the range filter moving average scan interval integration time of the A D converter burnout and reference junction compensation Acknowledging and Setting Alarms Describes how to acknowledge alarms and how to set alarms Setting and Operating the Display Describes how to set the display specification of the operation screen how to display messages and other display related operations Data acquisition and Saving to External Storage Medium Describes how to acquire the measured computed data and how to save the data to the external storage medium
195. e Measurement Using the RTD Example for the RD MV210 bd The resistance of three lead wires must be equal b oO o o o TE OO00000 ql aw ge ELA B Input terminals Decade resistance box Model 2793 01 Temperature Measurement Using the TC Example for the RD MV210 Thermocouple wires Copper wires or TC extension wires Ll wires DC voltage standard Bathe in crushed ice to keep at 0 C Input terminals Reference junction pot Model T MJ Reference Junction Compensation for the Thermocouple Input As the measurement terminal of the RD MV200 is generally at room temperature the actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0 C The RD MV200 measures the temperature of the terminal and makes adjustments by calculation Therefore when the measurement terminals are shorted equivalent to 0 C at the detector tip the temperature at the measurement terminal is displayed When calibrating the RD MV200 this compensation voltage thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application As shown in the figure by using a Model T MJ reference junction pot to compensate the reference junction a
196. e Save Trigger START RE Snapshot 4Panel Log FTP test FUNC key menu Menu Ref section Description Batch 10 11 Displays the batch screen for models with BT1 Alarm ACK 6 1 6 4 Release alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold Message 7 4 Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory Manual sample 8 12 Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Key lock 10 3 Enables or disables key lock when key lock is in use Logout 10 5 Logout when being logged in while key login is in use Trigger 8 6 8 11 Starts acquiring event data when Key Trigger is set as a trigger to start acquiring event data Math START STOP 11 3 Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 is equipped Math reset 11 3 Clears computed results when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation is suspended Math ACK 11 3 Clears the computation dropout display when the computation function M1 is equipped and the computation dropout occurs Snapshot 9 6 Saves the screen image data to the external medium Log 10 7 Displays log screens or the system information screen FTP test Execute FTP test 4Panel 7 15 Register 4 screen display s name when a 4 screen display is displayed Save Display Save Event 8 7 Stores the display data or event data to the external storage medium only when the display data
197. e arrow keys select the directory Files in the directory are listed to the right is the root directory 2 Pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor to the file list The list can be scrolled using the arrow keys To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Free space Displays the amount of free space on the external storage medium 4 Press the ESC key to return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen 9 8 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Deleting files and directories on the external storage medium in the setting mode Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press rew Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press soft key to display the Delete screen Delete Directory name File nane Time 16188098 DHR 2000 01 01 80 89 BAG 16188098 DDS 2000 81 01 80 89 B 10100160 DHR 2000 01 01 00 16 o 10100100 DDS 2000 01 01 00 16 TRASH 10100340 DDS 2000 01 01 80 34 10188348 DEY 10100538 DHR 10100438 DDS 10188438 DEY 10100400 DHR 10100358 DDS 18100538 DEV 18100548 DHR 10188548 DDS 10100548 DEY 18108568 DHR 2000 01 01 00 34 2000 01 01 00 53 2000 01 01 88 54 2000 01 0
198. e external storage medium First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition N N oN i Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wait i gt Trigger activated gt Trigger activated Trigger activated Stop Manual sampled data The first time manual sample is executed a manual sampled data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file for each successive manual sample operation Note __ If the external storage medium is not inserted the unsaved data are saved the first time when manual sample is executed after the external storage medium is inserted 8 10 8 4 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium TLOG data The first time TLOG computation is executed a TLOG computation data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file at each time interval When the number of TLOG data sets exceeds 400 a new file is created Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive Report data The first time report computation is executed a report data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file at each
199. e icon of the external storage medium on the status display section on the screen turns to red from green See section 4 2 When using manual save When the type of data to be acquired is display data only or display data and event data When the remaining time for storing the display data in the internal memory falls to the specified time the relay is energized When the type of data to be acquired is event data only In the Free mode the relay is energized when the remaining time for storing the event data in the internal memory falls to the specified time In the Trigger or Rotate mode the relay is not energized There is no alarm output 1 31 1 8 Other Functions Relay behavior Energized on Memory End NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Normal Memory end Power off NO C and NC denote normally opened common and normally closed respectively For the setting procedure see section 10 8 Remote Control Function R1 option When a contact or open collector signal is applied to the remote control terminal a predetermined operation is carried out Arbitrary controls can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals The available controls are listed below For the setting procedure see section 10 9 Function Remote Signal Operation None No operation Start Stop Edge Start stop acquiring data to the internal memory gt Sections 8 5 and 8 6 Trigger Trigger Trigger to start acquiring event
200. e key lock This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 Press the Keylock soft key A window appears for you to enter the password suonouny 1934 0 2 3 Enter the password and press the DISP ENTER key The password is set in the basic setting mode See section 10 4 For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 The key lock is released 10 3 10 4 Setting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select whether or not to enable the key lock on the individual keys and the external storage medium The initial setting is Free disabled on all parameters e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key 3 l Keylock Use Not 1 Password 2 START STOP MENU USER DISP ENTER 3 Alarm ACK Free Hath Free Henory write Free a en anual sample Nedia Free The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond
201. e message colors on the trend display are shown below They cannot be changed Message Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Displayed Color Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Light blue 7 6 7 5 Setting the Message String Trend Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key O8 Message No Characters The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Characters Move the cursor to the desired message number 2 Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the message string Enter the message string up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Character on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys
202. e partial expanded display 7 12 Use Not use batch function for models with BT1 10 13 3 Key lock 10 4 Use Not use key lock Password Keys to lock enable disable the key lock Key login 10 6 Use Not use key login Auto logout On Off Use Not use user ID User name User ID Password Allow Prohibit basic setting mode 4 Save Load Initialize 4 1 Save settings Save setup data to the external storage medium 9 1 4 2 Load settings Load setup data from the external storage medium 9 1 4 3 Delete Delete files on the external storage medium 9 5 4 4 Format Format the external storage medium 9 5 4 5 Initialize Initialize the setup data in the internal memory and clear measured computed data 9 8 5 Remote 10 9 Action assignment on remote terminals Report 11 13 Report types Date Time of creation Report channel assignments Sum unit Timer TLOG 11 9 Timer mode absolute time relative time Interval Reference time for the absolute timer Turn On Off reset at each interval Turn On Off data storage 6 Communications 6 1 Ethernet Serial 6 2 FTP client 6 3 Control login timeout 7 End 3 6 Terminate operations in the basic setting mode See the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 3 18 3 6 Common Key Operations This section describes common key operations that are used often Soft keys Arrow keys four
203. e with respect to the specified memory length data length see section 8 11 When pretrigger is specified and the START key is pressed causing the RD MV200 to enter the trigger wait state data of size equal to the pretrigger amount are acquired to the internal memory The bar is displayed in orange After acquiring data of size equal to the pretrigger the length of the bar stays fixed However the relevant data are updated until the trigger is activated When the trigger is activated the bar turns green Data are acquired to the internal memory after the pretrigger data During the Trigger mode see section 8 2 Full is displayed when data acquisition to all blocks is complete When Full is displayed event data are no longer acquired even if the trigger condition is met In this case save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium e Block display When the event data storage area is divided into multiple blocks the usage condition of the blocks are displayed White block No data Green block Block containing data that were acquired to the internal memory after starting the current acquisition of event data Gray block Block containing data that were acquired before the current start operation 7 The external storage medium condition No display No storage medium inserted D and E displayed in order Accessing the storage medium E Storage medium is idle no access F The used space of the s
204. eS ar WOW Pr rb a po B53 wn 0 O 0 i 0 0 0 0 The scale is divided into 4 to 12 sections as shown in the figure above Scale for display position 1 4 scale division example Span Span Span Span Span Span Span Span Span Scale for display position 10 10 scale division example Span 0 to 100 Unit UNIT Scale for display position 2 5 scale division example Scale for display position 3 6 scale division example Scale for display position 4 7 scale division example Scale for display position 5 8 scale division example Scale for display position 6 9 scale division example Scale for display position 7 10 scale division example Scale for display position 8 11 scale division example Scale for display position 9 12 scale division example ain ds pate pe aa i 0 bia A 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT 0 to 100 Unit UNIT nur e e E a ways n e e wy 7 17 Aejdsig y Bulyesado pue Huas 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend During trend vertical display The scale display position is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
205. ection of the trend and bar graph can be set to horizontal or vertical The background color used in the trend digital bar graph and summary displays can be set to white or black common to all screens The line width of the trend can be selected as 1 2 or 3 dots The line width of the trip line can be selected as 1 2 or 3 dots The grid lines can be displayed on the trend s waveform display area by dividing the display span into 4 to 12 sections The interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched on the trend digital and bar graph displays can be specified The displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key Oo To display the setting screen press the soft key Oom View Direction Trend Horizontal Bar graph Vertical 2 Background White 4 3 Trend line 2 dot 4 Trip line 2 dot 4 5 Grid fig div 1 6 Scroll time 5s 7 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Set the d
206. ectrostatic induction Connect the shield to the functional ground terminal as necessary earth ground the functional ground terminal make sure you are not grounding at two points To minimize noise caused by electromagnetic induction twist the measurement circuit wires at short equal intervals Make sure to earth ground the protective ground terminal through minimum resistance AC power supply models less than 100 Q When using internal reference junction compensation on the thermocouple input take measures to stabilize the temperature at the input terminal Always use the input terminal cover Do not use thick wires which may cause large heat dissipation cross sectional area 0 5 mm or less recommended Make sure that the air temperature remains reasonably stable Large temperature fluctuations can occur if a nearby fan turns ON or OFF Connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices can cause signal degradation affecting all connected devices If you need to make a parallel connection then Turn the burnout function OFF See section 5 9 Ground the instruments to the same point Do not turn ON or OFF another instrument during operation This can have adverse effects on the other instruments RTDs cannot be wired in parallel OOZAIN GH 24 Bus 21049 e 2 3 Input Signal Wiring AN To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF _CAUTION_ A Do not apply inpu
207. ed OFF For the action of acquiring data and the operating procedure see sections 8 1 8 3 and 8 12 TLOG data only on models with the optional computation function M1 The average maximum minimum sum or maximum minimum can be computed for the specified channels at predetermined intervals and the result can be acquired to the internal memory You can specify the interval For the action of acquiring data see sections 8 1 and 8 3 SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 Report data only on models with the optional computation function M1 The average maximum minimum and sum can be computed for the specified channels at predetermined intervals and the result can be acquired to the internal memory You can select one hour hourly report one day daily report one day one week daily and weekly reports or one day one month daily and monthly reports for the interval For the action of acquiring data see sections 8 1 and 8 3 Saving Data to the External Storage Media External storage media Various data can be stored to the following storage media e 3 5 floppy disk 1 44 MB 2HD e Zip disk 100 MB ATA flash memory card 4 MB to 160 MB The size varies depending on the memory card that you are using Save method There are two methods of storing data to the external storage medium One method stores the data when the storage medium is inserted into the drive referred to as manual save The other method stores data automatically
208. ed to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed even when the group is changed 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select the group using the up and down arrow keys 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the selected group To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Expanding reducing the time axis The time axis can be expanded or reduced with respect to the display reference position Display data The time axis can be expanded to twice the trend display It can also be reduced down to 1 60th of the trend display Event data The time axis can be reduced down to 1 60th The factor by which the display can be expanded or reduced at one time by carrying out the procedures below varies depending on the display update rate for the display data and the sampling interval for the event data being displayed To expand or reduce the display further repeat the procedures below 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select ZOOM or ZOOM using the up and down arrow keys Ap TREND E HISTORY ml prJ gt ZOOH 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER expand or reduce the time axis To close the menu with
209. ed when setting numbers with exponents Example 5 0E 12 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal When using exponents to set values use 5 or less digits for the mantissa and two digits for the exponent The allowed range is as follows 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 11 15 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog F 11 7 TLOG Computation Scan mene Interval set by a timer Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values of the specified channel at specified time intervals The interval is set by timers The example shown in the following figure indicates the case in which the average value of channel 1 over each interval TLOG AVE 01 is determined Equation TLOG AVG 01 Average value Average value f EEE EEE EEE EEE Time Sampling TLOG computation cannot be performed when the corresponding measurement channel is set to Skip or the corresponding computation channel is turned Off Timer Mode and Action Timer mode There are two timer modes absolute mode and relative mode e Absolute mode Timer expires at times determined from the reference time and the interval The r
210. ee Entering Numbers on page 3 21 This setting is void for hourly reports 4 Report CH This is the report data number to which the measurement computation channel is assigned Select from R01 to R30 The reports are output in order according to this number 5 On Off On Assign channels to Report CH Off Do not assign report channels to Report CH The report data number and the data are not displayed 6 Channel Set the measurement or computation channel to assign to the report channel All measurement and computation channels can be specified However the reports are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off 7 Sum scale sum unit Select Off s min h or day See section 11 11 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Date Day of the week This is the date for monthly reports or the day of the week for weekly reports The report is created at the specified time on the specified date or day of the week Time This is the time at which daily weekly and monthly reports are created Hourly reports are created every hour on the hour 11 28 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 1 A List of Messages Occasionally error codes and messages appe
211. eeds the set range Jan 11 2088 04 15 28 85 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Jan 11 2088 83 23 19 681 Measured data have been initialized The total number of inputs on the RD MV200 the capacity of the internal memory the communication functions the external storage drive the options the MAC address and the firmware version number can be displayed For the operating procedure see section 10 7 Number of measurement channels Number of computation channels indicated as ANALOG 8 s in this example ANALOG 8 MATH 12 MEMORY 1208888 Internal memory capacity OPTION REHOTE RS 422 PE 5 ETHERNET Communication function ZIP External storage medium drive ALARN 6 6 6 6 PRODUCT HAC address 00 00 64 81 0A D3 MAC address Manufactured 2008 07 21 Date of manufacturing Version 3 88 Firmware version number When the screw input terminal is equipped the suffix code for input terminal is 2 s is 1 30 1 8 Other Functions Displayed Language The displayed language can be set to English Japanese German or French If German or French is selected the following information is displayed in the specified language For all other information the displays will be the same as those for English Locations where German or French is used Menu used to switch the screen in the operation mode Function menus in the operation mode Err
212. eference time is specified by the hour 00 to 23 Example 1 Reference time 14 00 Interval 12 h The expiration time is set to 2 00 2 00 AM and 14 00 2 00 PM Example 2 Reference time 00 00 Interval 10 min The expiration time is set to 0 00 0 10 0 20 23 40 and 23 50 For example if the computation is started at 9 30 the time expiration will occur at 09 40 09 50 10 00 and so on e Relative mode The timer is started when the computation is started The timer is repeated at each interval The timer is suspended while the power is lost Example Interval 00 15 The timer expires every 15 minutes after the computation is started Setting timers Timers are set in the basic setting mode For detail see section 11 9 Setting the timer No for TLOG computation The number of the timer used by the channel computing the TLOG is selected from 1 2 and 3 in the setting mode For the setting procedure see section 11 8 About the sum scale of the TLOG SUM In the sum computation TLOG SUM of time series data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min or h a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed 11 16 11 7 TLOG Comp
213. els RD MV220 Channel 31 to 60 30 channels RD MV230 Channel 31 to 60 30 channels Types of computations The following computations can be performed In the table below y represents the computed result X and n generally represent the measured data of a measurement channel and a constant For details see Data that can be used in equations Type Description Four arithmetical operations Addition subtraction multiplication x and division xx Determines the power y X SQR Determines the square root ABS Determines the absolute value LOG Determines the common logarithm y logiox EXP Determines the exponent y e Relational computation Determines lt lt gt 2 and outputs 0 or 1 Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two channels NOT negation of an arbitrary channel and outputs O or 1 Statistical computation TLOG Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values at specified time intervals over the time interval There are three timers used to set the time interval For detail see section 11 7 Data that can be used in equations The following types of data are used to perform computations For TLOG computation only measured and computed data can be used For all other computations all types of data can be use
214. en the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value Difference lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value 6 6 6 2 Alarm Setting Upper limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value see section 6 4 The time interval is specified using a number of measurements Lower limit on rate of change alarm The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value see section 6 4 The time interval is specified using a number of measurements Delay upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Delay lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified time period delay period see section 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period 1 Can be specified only on difference computation channels 2 Can be specified only on measurement channe
215. enesantvdstaet aerar ainoaa aaeain a vii Overview of Functions led Overview of the RD2MV 200 iisen aaa aa S NERE EENES 1 1 1 2 Functions of the Input Section ccruite er Saa a Endein aeaaeai AAE 1 2 1 3 Display FUNCOM se cc cetcsiitestyscecd stats cecavdacgeesncheedens ivzadne saeeeineeialenedelidiivestgnieedaigic Haneaeieens 1 5 WA Storage FUNCUOM casos vivid ca ccnccesaaccesteeaacecses spans caacnaice cxctacientascshsassasneedueks sactaceesaecdasdenaaceaecis 1 20 1 5 Alarm Function 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function MT CPTI ci acs 55 des ce ends achcds ati hacd an deeees cadcieed ch aah ds doen pdecas dhacaycbenacbegeesarseaenneacanaaceevuscneds 1 25 1 8 Other FUNCIONS wssciccctescvsscasscascrcenesssteessecameesat sob esastcvactedacdetiestenidicstienessatencsscctdvaatienasetacts 1 29 Before Using the RD MV200 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the RD MV200 oes esceeeseeeenceseeeteeeeeaeeeaeereaeeeseeeeeeeaees 2 1 2 2 Installing the RD MV200 oi ccci c2 cccscccescssccescseccasccasecsersetncnessesedvanca ctsasstanessecsseessdeiepescsesacienes 2 2 2 3 Input Sig mal WiN sisses anea ar cae EEEE raa EEEE 2 3 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 Option ssec 2 8 2 5 FAILiMemory End Wiring F1 Option seseivenciccseserccctessieccieed isi rara raa 2 11 2 6 Remote Control Wiring R1 Option eeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeaeesaaeeseeesaeeaes 2 12 27 NGA Output Wiring D5 Option 4
216. ent is to be enabled the time set at Summer the RD MV200 automatically sets the clock ahead by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on June 1 the time is set ahead to 10 o clock June 1 e When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled the time set at Winter the RD MV200 automatically sets the clock back by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on December 1 the time is set back to 8 o clock December 1 The daylight savings time adjustment function is set using year month day and time Set the time for every year The year is specified using the lower two digits 00 to 79 represent year 2000 to 2079 80 to 99 represent 1980 to 1999 Setting the time at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled disabled These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w To display the setting screen press the soft key OR Daylight saving time YY MM DD HH Sumner tm 30 01701 00 Winter On 80701701 6a 1 2 The numbers in front of the operating procedure s
217. eper layers 220 The file is already in use Try again later Wait till file is free 230 There is no setting file Access to other files 231 Abnormal setting exists in file Access to other files Errors related to historical trend 232 There is no available data This message may appear when recalling historical trend Access to other files 233 The specified historical data do not exist This message may appear when recalling historical trend See section 4 5 234 The specified channel is not assigned to the display group This message may appear when switching to trend or bar graph from overview See sections 4 4 and 7 6 12 2 12 1 A List of Messages Errors related to FTP client For information regarding the FTP client function of the RD MV200 see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M Code Message 280 IP address is not set or FTP function is not available Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280 Character String and Details HOSTADDR The RD MV s IP address has not been specified Check the IP address DORMANT Internal processing error LINK Data link is disconnected Check the cable connection 281 FTP mail box operation error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 281 Character String and Details MAIL nternal processing error STATUS
218. er boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key EEN Tenperature The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Temperature Unit Select C or F C Celsius F Fahrenheit Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 24 Chapter 11 Computation Report Function Option 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Equations can be written to computation channels by using the measured data of measurement channels or computed data from computation channels as variables The result of the computation can be displayed or stored Computation is performed every scan interval In addition a moving average rolling average can be calculated on the computed result of a computation channel and the moving average value can be used as the computed data for that channel For report functions see sections 11 11 to 11 13 Computation channels Model Channels RD MV204 Channel 31 to 38 8 channels RD MV208 Channel 31 to 38 8 channels RD MV210 Channel 31 to 60 30 chann
219. eriod corresponding to 1 division on the time axis on the trend display is specified The time axis on the trend display is determined by the display update rate The sampling interval of the display data is also determined by the display update rate The display update rate cannot be changed while data sampling is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key Trend Save interval Time diy Em 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Time div Display update rate Select the display update rate from 15 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 2h and 4h Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note When Auto save is set for saving data to the external storage medium the Auto save interval box is displ
220. es the common logarithm EXP Determines the exponent Relational computation Determines lt lt gt 2 and outputs 0 or 1 Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two channels NOT negation of an arbitrary channel and outputs 0 or 1 Statistical computation TLOG Determines the average AVE maximum MAX minimum MIN sum SUM and maximum minimum P P at specified time intervals for the specified channels You can specify the interval For detail see section 11 7 Rolling average Determines the moving average of the computed result at scan intervals for the channel for which the equation is specified The sampling interval and the number of samples are specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The initial setting is set so that the rolling average is disabled The following elements can be used in the computing equations Element Description Constants K01 to K30 Set by the computation function Communication input data C01 to C30 Set by the communication function RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual Condition of the remote control terminals D01 to D08 Use ON OFF 1 or 0 of the remote input signal 1 25 SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 6 Computation Functi
221. eseseeseacseneseseencaceneuesesneusaesesusecsneesaeeneeeeees 13 3 Calibration siere irria nea nina aaa a ELAO a EENT A EAEra a E E 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts 0 0 0 cece cece cece tence 13 5 Chapter 14 Specifications Appendix Index 14 1 Input SPOCHICALIONS sicc cccdcrccscseectesessctncsettecves cascstiesaesstdbarestexstbecsantdeadsacvectasereacbieeseeseneses 142 Display Specifications s xa sii 0 s6 deinacseceancisaecas casnsivebed ressazice tisk rtasenscegse mactiatisadestcase Ginasas 14 3 Data Storage Specifications occ icccccscsccccesesseecccasscesecesvesensadesepacssssssecasssaseanessserssvsbeasteass 14 4 Alarm Function SPeOCiHiCAtiOMS sisisi ccdaeateceasachcencvactasits S 14 5 Specifications of Communication Functions 14 6 Specifications of Optional FUNCTIONS oo eet eee eee ee see ee eneeneeee tee 14 7 General SPSCMICAOMS sakonean EER 14 8 Dimensional Drawings 1 25 52 c22sassccaveascisaceaccastissdnaaietecesatceasa stcsathdenesaviegsnicadvaanasbassancsadensuesaats 14 19 Appendix 1 Parameters and Initial SettingS c cccccsssscssesssesessesessesesssensesssensneasesseseasasens App 1 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files ssecssersrsssssrsercssensarsrserseriesraserirsnasesensresesersnssnserenseres App 7 xii Chapter 1 Overview of Functions 1 1 Overview of the RD MV200 Unlike conventional recorders that record data on charts the RD MV200 displays the meas
222. essing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the alarm delay period Enter an integer value in the range 1 to 3600 s and press the DISP ENTER key Procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 If the scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay period it will operate at the specified period 1 s Example If the alarm delay period is set to 5 s it will operate at 6 s 6 8 6 3 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Operation of the delay upper lower limit alarm For the operation of the delay upper lower limit alarm see section 1 5 This section will describe special cases of its operation When delay alarm is set on a computation channel and the computation is stopped If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting the alarm is turned ON after the specified period delay period elapses Computation stopped Alarm setting Computed value T Ar E gt Alarm turns ON Delay alarm when a power failure occurs Alarm detection is reset upon a power failure It
223. essing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys izo INFOR E HATION JUMP TO HISTORY Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend The displayed data type is as follows e When configured to acquire only the display data to the internal memory Display data e When configured to acquire only the event data to the internal memory Event data e When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory Data type selected in the memory summary To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Message Summary Procedure Number of the message displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was written User name when using key login function 06 006 Hessage Time User Name MESSAGES Jan 84 20080 82 24 59 userl POWER OFF Jan 84 20080 82 24 53 userl Cursor mp HESSAGES Jan 04 2000 02 24 06 userl Up and down arrow HESSAGE4 Jan 04 2000 02 24 88 useri keys can be used to POWER ON Jan 04 2000 02 21 83 userl move the cursor and NESSAGE1 Jan 84 2000 62 28 59 userl scroll the screen The date and time when the message
224. ets in the internal memory The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date and time the last data were acquired M SAMPLE DATA TLOG DATA REPORT DATA SAMPLE DATA 000 400 Start Time 83 58 Jan 1 2008 80 12 48 04 48 Jan 1 2008 80 14 58 ODISPLAY DATA EVENT DATA RELAY 1 000000 2 000000 3 0100000 _ Status of alarm output relays Red Activated Green Released End Time Data Factor Jan 81 2000 8 25 64 Jan 1 2888 00 15 04 Jan 01 2000 00 14 16 Jan 81 2000 00 11 24 Jan 81 2000 08 18 48 Jan 01 2000 08 05 44 Jan 01 2000 00 27 54 Jan 01 2000 00 25 02 Jan 01 2000 00 14 48 Jan 01 2000 00 12 54 Jan 01 2000 08 11 84 Jan 01 2000 00 10 40 86 Sampling 388 Auto Save 17 Stop 46 Stop 9 Stop 149 Stop Selection of the file type to be displayed display data files or event data files Procedure Date and time the data acquisition ended Date and time the data acquisition started File status Number of data in the file Cursor Up and down arrow keys can be used to move the cursor and scroll the screen On models with the optional BT1 batch function the batch number and lot number for each file can be displayed in place of the date and time the data acquisition ended Selecting the type of file display data or event data to display in the Memory Summary This operation is carried out on the Memory Summary sc
225. ey To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial Settings of Channel Display Color Channel 1 Red Channel 2 Green Channel 3 Blue Channel 4 Blue violet Channel 5 Brown Channel 6 Orange Channel 7 Yellow green Channel 8 Light blue Channel 9 violet Channel 10 Gray Channel 11 Red Channel 12 Green Channel 13 Blue Channel 14 Blue violet Channel 15 Brown Channel 16 Orange Channel 17 Yellow green Channel 18 Light blue Channel 19 violet Channel 20 Gray Channel 21 Red Channel 22 Green Channel 23 Blue Channel 24 Blue violet Channel 25 Brown Channel 26 Orange Channel 27 Yellow green Channel 28 Light blue Channel 29 violet Channel 30 Gray Available colors for the channels Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray limes cyan dark blue yellow silver and purple 7 12 7 9 Using Zone Displays Trend Procedure By using zones the waveforms of each channel can be displayed in their own zones Because the waveforms do not overlap they are easier to view These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using th
226. firmed with the memory summary Section 4 5 When a power disruption occurs the file is closed 8 3 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eea e 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Event data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to event data only or display data and event data There are three modes in data acquisition Free Trigger and Rotate Free mode can be set when acquiring the event data only Mode Description Free Data acquisition is started by pressing the START key The operation is stopped by pressing the STOP key When the storage area of the internal memory becomes full or the number of files in the internal memory exceeds 16 it is overwritten The number of event data files The number of event data files is equivalent to the number of times the data acquisition is started stopped or the number of files that are segmented by the data length see section 8 11 during auto save For details related to the manual save and auto save see section 8 4 Trigger When the internal memory is not divided into blocks One event data file is created in the internal memory Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped At this point the acquisition does not start even if t
227. group 1 bar graph group 1 and overview ALL TREND All trend displays groups 1 through 4 ALL DIGITAL All digital displays groups 1 through 4 ALL BAR All bar graph displays groups 1 through 4 A name can be assigned to the screen For the operating procedure see section 7 15 Operation Flow Diagram Screen menu Sub menu 4 PANNEL display Screen menu Sub menu A i A a x gt ese ra Lao Vv A AeA ein Selection of screens Selection of screens to be assigned EXPAND EXPAND Selection of a quadrant To other screens Assignment of screens Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 V4 gt Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the 4 screen display 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 2 Select 4 PANEL using the up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 4 Select the screen to display using the up and down arrow keys CE 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Switching the 4 screen display 1 In the 4 screen display pressing the right arrow key switches the display in the order 4 Panel 1 4 Panel 2 4 Panel 3 4 Panel 4 4 Panel 1 and so on 2 By pressi
228. gs which can be selected 1 2 3 or 4 A higher number corresponds to a brighter screen setting The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there has been no key operation for a certain amount of time The screen will return to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The initial setting is Off These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mew Press the soft key Oom To display the setting screen press the soft key 4 LCD Brightness Backlight saver On Off Saver time Restore The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the brightness of the screen 1 Brightness Select from 1 2 3 and 4 Setting the backlight saver 2 On Off When On is selected Saver time and Restore boxes are displayed 3 Saver time Select the time from 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 30 min and 1 hour If the specified time elapses without any key operation the LCD backlight is automatically dimmed 4 Restore Select Key
229. hanged are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon l 1 1 First CH Last CH First CH Last CH ar ar Jar r Tag r Tag Tag J Tag J k Moving average Filter iia 2 Count Off I Alarm Delay r Alarm Delay Time 18 s Time 185 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Tag and Alarm Delay Time are also simultaneously set Input Filter Setting for RD MV204 RD MV208 2 Filter Filter Select Off or set the time constant of the filter Moving Average Setting for RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 3 Moving Average Count Select Off or set the number of data points for the moving average Note Regardless of this setting filter and moving average operations are not performed for the digital inputs DI Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The following table shows the values Filter Moving Average Value Description Filter Off Do not use the filter 2s Filter time constant 2 s 5s Filter time constant 5 s 10s Filter time c
230. haracters 14 2 14 2 Display Specifications Display unit 10 4 inch TFT color LCD VGA 480 x 640 dot resolution Channel display color Trend Bar graph Selectable from 16 colors Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Lightblue Violet Gray lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Light Gray Purple Initial settings of channel display color Channel No Color Background Trend screen Direction 1 Red 2 Green 3 Blue 4 Blue violet 5 Brown 6 Orange 7 Yellow green 8 Light blue 9 violet 10 Gray 11 Red 12 Green 13 Blue 14 Blue violet 15 Brown 16 Orange 17 Yellow green 18 Light blue 19 violet 20 Gray 21 Red 22 Green 23 Blue 24 Blue violet 25 Brown 26 Orange 27 Yellow green 28 Light blue 29 violet 30 Gray White or black selectable vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels 10 channels per screen maximum All channels indication 60 channels maximum including computation channels Number of screens Line width 4 screens 4 group 1 2 and 3 dots selectable Display update rate Contents Bar graph screen Direction Number of indication channels Number of screens 4 screens 4 group Scales Base position of bar Left right or center only for horizontal Waveform One division has 30 dots e RD MV204 RD MV208 15 s 30s 1 2 5 10 20 30 min 1 2 4 hours div selecta
231. have enough space Change the external storage medium to save the remaining data i The message Exchange media to continue the saving operation will be displayed Change the external storage medium and close the front cover The message Do you want to continue to save measured data will be displayed 2 Selecting Yes and pressing the DISP ENTER key saves the remaining data to the external storage medium Selecting No and pressing the DISP ENTER key does not save the remaining data Note The data saving operation is interrupted in five minutes after the message Exchange media to continue was displayed The message Memory save to media was interrupted will be displayed in this case The remaining data can be saved to the external storage medium by another manual save operation wnp n 6e e10 s jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eea e 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Explanation Name of the directory to which to save the data For the setting procedure of the directory to which to save the data see section 8 9 Each time the storage medium is inserted into the drive and the data are saved the sequence number of the directory name increments by one Example When the specified directory name is DATAO the first set of data are saved to DATA0 000 and the second set of data are saved to DATAO 001 e When the directory name is changed the sequence number
232. he number of files exceeds 16 A file is created at specified acquisition periods data length see section 8 11 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Explanation Saving the data to the external storage medium using key operation during auto save mode This operation applies when the data acquisition of the display data or the data acquisition of event data in the free mode is in progress and the data storage to the storage medium is set to auto save The display data or event data can be saved to the external storage medium at arbitrary times The data acquisition to the internal memory continues even if this operation is carried out 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu shown below Save Display When the type of data acquired to the internal memory is display data or display data and event data Save Event When the type of data acquired to the internal memory is event data and the trigger is set to free mode 1 For the setting procedure see section 8 11 2 The soft key is not displayed in the trigger or rotate mode 2 Press the soft key to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Save Save Display Event EB Save Display The display data file is closed and saved to the external storage medium Save Event The event data file is closed and saved to the external storage medium Saving the data using key operation during au
233. he RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 e Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes Output Communication Command Execution and Setup Data Loading Code Message 300 Command is too long 301 Too many number of commands delimited with 302 This command has not been defined 303 Data request command can not be enumerated with sub delimiter 350 Command is not permitted to the current user level 351 This command cannot be specified in the current mode 352 The option is not installed 353 This command cannot be specified in the current setting 354 This command is not available during sampling or calculating 12 5 Bunooyseqnos D 12 1 A List of Messages Memory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output Communication Command Execution An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 360 Output interface must be chosen from Ethernet or RS by using XO command 361 The memory data is not saved for the communication output 362 There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND 363 All data have already been transferred Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message
234. he alarm output relay when the alarm occurs energize de energize function of the output relay e When the alarm changes from the ON state to the OFF state return to normal condition turn OFF the output relay with an alarm ACK operation output relay hold function 1 24 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 Option You can perform computations by specifying a computing equation and display the results as computed values of a computation channel on various displays such as the trend display numerical display and bar graph display You can use data of measurement channels data of computation channels constants etc in the computing equation Computed data can be saved similar to measured data of measurement channels Computation is performed every scan interval For details on computation functions see chapter 11 Computation channels Model Channel RD MV204 RD MV208 RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Channels 31 to 38 8 channels Channels 31 to 38 8 channels Channels 31 to 60 30 channels Channels 31 to 60 30 channels Channels 31 to 60 30 channels Types of Computations The following types of computations can be performed Type Description Four arithmetical operations Addition subtraction multiplication x and division XX Determines the power SQR Computes the square root ABS Determines the absolute value LOG Determin
235. he character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 8 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu press the ESC key Note The extension PNL will automatically be added to the file name The following character combinations cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for file names Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are also not allowed 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to save the data The saved file appears in the file list If a file with the same name as you entered exists on the external storage medium a message will appear to confirm overwriting Select Yes or No and press the DISP ENTER key 9 3 eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue sayi4 GBuibeuew fa 9 1 Saving loading setup data Loading setup data in the basic setting mode Procedure Loads the setup data set in both the setting mode and the basic Setting mode from a setup file in the external storage medium and make the settings effective Returns to the operation mode when loading is completed These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press mw P
236. he display data and the event data 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition and all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel For models with the batch function BT1 option that has the batch function enabled see section 10 13 the batch information is also displayed 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Note ____ e One file is created for one set of start and stop operations The maximum number of files that can be stored in the internal memory is the specified number of blocks When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When the power resumes data are written to a new file Memory write operation can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands The START STOP operation also starts stops the report function e When the computation is stopped it is started with the START key 8 14 8 7 Saving the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium This operation saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Here data refers to display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option and report data
237. he input signal of the measurement channel is set to the averaged value of the m most current data points the number of moving averaged data points acquired at the scan interval The number of moving averaged data points can be set in the range 2 to 16 The moving average is initially turned OFF The figure below shows an example indicating the operation of the buffer for the moving average computation when the number of moving averaged data points is set to 5 Buffer data at the Buffer data at the Buffer data at the nth sampling n 1th sampling n 2th sampling New data New data 1 10 0 mV 2 15 0 mV 3 ee 10 0 mV 4 5 0 mV 5 0 0 mV Deleted Deleted Moving average value 8 0 mV Integration Time of the A D Converter The RD MV200 uses an A D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital signal By setting the integration time to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle the power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated The integration time of the A D converter is selected according to the model from the table below If Auto is selected the RD MV200 will automatically detect the power supply frequency and select 16 7 ms or 20 ms Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16 7 ms and 20 ms this setting can be used to eliminate the power frequency noise for either frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 100 ms is available on the RD MV210 RD
238. he trigger is activated Data acquisition MN Trigger wait Trigger activated Stop When the internal memory is divided into blocks An event data file is created in each block Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped When the trigger is activated again data are acquired and stored to the next block When all blocks are full no more acquisition takes place First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition ZN i uN f N Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger activated Trigger activated i 5S gt Trigger activated Stop 8 4 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Mode Description Rotate When the internal memory is not divided into blocks One event data file is created in the internal memory Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped Data are overwritten when the trigger is activated again Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state data are overwritten Press the STOP key to terminate data acquisition Data acquisition AN Trigger wait
239. holder Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers Some areas inside the instrument have high voltages Do not remove the cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by Omega s qualified personnel only External Connection Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or control unit Damage to the protective housing Using the instrument in a manner not specified in this manual can damage the instrument s protective housing Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the RD MV200 If some of the contents not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them RD MV200 Main Unit There is a name plate on the rear side of the RD MV200 Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate match those on the order Model i Optional code code Description MV200 4 ch RD MV208 MV200 8 ch RD MV21 MV200 10 ch RD MV220 MV200 20 ch MV200 30 ch External 1 Floppy disk storage Zip disk medium ATA flash memory card Languag
240. hoose an installation location with the minimum mechanical vibration Horizontal Install the RD MV200 horizontally However the RD MV200 can be inclined up to approximately 10 degrees backwards when the font feet are up Note Condensation may occur if the RD MV200 is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In addition measurement errors will result when using thermocouples In this case let the RD MV200 adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using it The lifetime of the LCD may be shortened if the RD MV200 is used in a high temperature environment over a long period of time When installing the RD MV200 in a high temperature environment greater than 40 C we recommend the backlight brightness of the LCD be set to a low setting For setting the LCD brightness see section 7 14 Do not install the RD MV200 in the following places In direct sunlight or near heat sources Install the RD MV200 in a place with small temperature fluctuations near room temperature 23 C Placing the RD MV200 in direct sunlight or near heat sources can cause adverse effects on the internal circuitry Where an excessive amount of soot steam moisture dust or corrosive gases are present Soot steam moisture dust and corrosive gases will adversely affect the RD MV200 Avoid such locations Near strong magnetic field sources Do not bring magnets or
241. hown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 On Off Select whether or not to use the daylight savings time adjustment function If On is selected a box used to enter the year month and day appears If this parameter is set to On and the summer winter time is set this parameter turns Off automatically when the set time is elapsed 2 Summer Winter Set the time at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled disabled Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the year month day and time Enter the values and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 10 22 10 14 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key suoloun g 418410 2 10 23 10 15 Setting the Temperature Unit Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select the temperature unit from C or F These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The paramet
242. ical synchronous Approx 60 Hz signal TTL negative 15 Connecting to the monitor 1 Turn OFF the power both the monitor and the RD MV200 2 Connect the monitor to the RD MV200 using an analog RGB cable 3 Turn ON both the monitor and the RD MV200 Note e When the power of the RD MV200 is ON the video signal is alive at the output terminal The picture on the monitor may become unstable if the RD MV200 or other equipment is brought too close to the monitor Some monitors may display a picture from which the sides are missing 2 13 OOZAIN GY a4 Bursn 210498 e 2 8 Power Supply Wiring This section describes how to connect the power supply cable Make sure to read this section before wiring the power supply cables 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC Power Supply Model Precautions to be taken when wiring the power supply To prevent electric shock and damage to the recorder observe the following warnings A WARNING e Confirm that the supply voltage meets the rated power supply voltage before connecting the cable e Confirm that the power is turned OFF before connecting the power cord e To prevent electric shock and the possibility of fire use only the power cord that is supplied by Omega e Always use protective ground terminal to prevent electric shock Connect the power cord to a three pole power outlet that has a protective ground terminal e Never use an extension cord that does not have protective ground term
243. ication Interface User s Manual Save Load Initialize 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Delete 4 Format 5 Initialize H 2 R 4 5 Soft key Settings in the basic setting mode Title Item 1 Alarm 6 4 Reflash alarm AND operation of alarm output relays Energize de energize alarm output relays Hold non hold alarm output relays Hold non hold alarm displays Rate of change alarm interval Turn On Off the alarm hysteresis A D 5 9 Integration time of the A D converter Scan interval Burn out Off Up Down Reference junction compensation select internal external compensation voltage when using external Temperature 10 15 Temperature unit 2 Memory 8 11 Save method to the external storage medium Type of data to be acquired Event data e Sampling interval Mode Free Trigger Rotate Number of blocks number of memory divisions Data length file size Pre trigger position Type of trigger to use suoneiado UoWWOD epoyy UNY S 1ed JO SEWeN 7 3 5 Configuring the Functions Soft key Settings in the basic setting mode Title Item Memory amp trend 8 10 Measurement channels to acquire data display the trend Computation channels to acquire data display the trend Aux Switch between tag display and channel display 7 2 Minimum remaining amount of internal memory at which to generate the alarm 10 8 Set the displayed language 10 10 Use Not us
244. if there are less than 10 data sets the most recent report data with the maximum report data number are displayed Left arrow key Displays the report data that is 10 data sets before the report data being displayed However if there are less than 10 data sets the oldest report data report data number 1 are displayed Note SSS When new report data are created while displaying the report data the screen is not updated The most recent report data can be displayed by carrying out the following operations e Press the DISP ENTER key and display the report data again from the menu Press the right arrow key su 195 uopesado BulyosyuMs gt 4 19 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Operation Flow Diagram HISTORICAL TREND Screen menu lt gt Moving the cursor A Screen menu Sub menu al ty gt v al l Memory information Group channels All channels ALARM SUMMARY Expanding reducing MESSAGE SUMMARY the time axis MEMORY SUMMARY Load display data Load event data Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 lt gt Arrow keys Procedure The re are 6 methods in displaying the historical trend screen From the alarm summary See section 4 5 From the message summary See section 4 5 From the memory summary See section 4
245. ifferent models Model Measurement Channel Computation channel RD MV204 4 channels 1 to 4 8 channels 31 to 38 RD MV208 8 channels 1 to 8 8 channels 31 to 38 RD MV210 10 channels 1 to 10 30 channels 31 to 60 RD MV220 20 channels 1 to 20 30 channels 31 to 60 RD MV230 30 channels 1 to 30 30 channels 31 to 60 8 22 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Procedure Set the method of the display event data acquisition These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon rHenory Save E i Data BD 4 2 vent Sample rate is 3 Hode Trigger 4 Block 1 5 Data length 2inin 6 Pre Trigger a 7 Trigger Key on External off 7 8 Alarm off J The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Data save to the external storage medium 1 Save Set save method to the external storage medium Select Auto or Manual Auto auto sa
246. igured For details related to the setting and basic setting modes see section 3 5 Group Display The data displayed on the trend digital and bar graph displays are the data of measurement or computation channels that are assigned to the group Up to 10 channels can be assigned to a single group For the procedure used to assign channels to groups see section 7 6 Setting Groups Up to four groups can be registered The groups are common to the trend digital and bar graph displays On the trend digital and bar graph displays the displayed groups can be automatically switched at 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s or 1 min intervals Channel Number or Tag Display The channels can be displayed as channel number or tags The setting applies to all channels For the procedure related to the selecting the channel display or tag display see section 7 2 For the procedure related to setting the tags see section 7 1 1 5 suonoun4 JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 3 Display Function Trend Screen Displays the waveform of the measured and computed data The direction of the waveform display can be set to horizontal or vertical For details related to the display method see section 4 3 Trend Display Horizontal Numerical display section Display update rate play up fmin div tal Lda L6 18 20 PE Tag Channel no E E E ao E E E MHOUCO v o9 A2 P 95 358 Meas
247. inal otherwise the protection function will be compromised E Use a power supply that meets the following conditions Item Conditions Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz Allowable power supply frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 Maximum power consumption 55 VA 100 V 80 VA 240 V Note Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy Connection procedure 1 Check that the recorder is turned OFF 2 Connect the power cable supplied with the recorder to the power connector on the rear panel of the recorder 3 Connect the other end of the power cord to a socket that meets the requirements 2 14 2 8 Power Supply Wiring 12 VDC Power Supply Model A Using AC adapter Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned off to prevent electric shock To prevent electric shock or fire always use the power cable supplied by Omega e Before connecting the power cord check that the voltage on the supply side matches with the voltage rating of this recorder When not using the instrument for a long time unplug the power cord of the AC adapter Only use the AC adapter from Omega Part No B9230ZW Do not put objects on top
248. inboy eea e 8 4 Function that Saves the Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Manual Save Auto Save There are two methods in which the data are saved to the external storage medium manual save and auto save The external storage medium is inserted into the drive only when storing the data residing in the internal memory The data residing in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium when the storage medium is inserted into the drive and the MEDIA key is pressed Whether to store the entire data in the memory or only the data that have not been saved is specified beforehand The external storage medium is placed in the drive at all times Data saving to the external storage medium is done automatically Displayed data The display data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium at the specified interval auto save interval see section 8 8 Event data e During the free mode The event data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium at the specified interval data length see section 8 11 During trigger or rotate mode After acquiring the data to the internal memory over the specified period data length see section 8 11 the event data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium The following figure shows the operation when the acquisition area in the internal memory is divided using the trigger mode Data save to th
249. ing AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 Option A4 F1 A4 R1 F1 Option Terminal 2 ALARM BE 4 B 2 Kil w e wc ie NC c C c c C yo no No o NO Option Terminal 3 ALARM 25 24 23 22 zi we e w e NC c C c c C w o w o NO A5 A5 R1 Option Terminal 1 ALARM 4 13 12 ii NC NC NC NC c c c c NO NO No NO ALARM 24 23 22 2i NC NC NC NC c c c c NO NO No NO Contact Specifications Item Specification Output type Relay transfer contact energize de energize switchable Output capacity 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3A 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load Dielectric strength 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between output terminals and the ground terminal For details related to the switching of energized de energized state of the alarm relays see section 6 4 2 5 FAIL Memory End Wiring F1
250. inimum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed sum value 5 14 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed e The size of the date and time of creation is fixed to 16 bytes e The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Monthly data for 30 channels 2 16 11 x30 2 5 14x30 2 54 14x30 24 5 14x30 4 24 54 14 x 30 2 2058 bytes Number of report data sets and file size The file size varies depending on the number of report data sets as follows e One report data set of monthly reports Size of the header section size of the data section of one report data set 3055 bytes e 40 report data sets of monthly reports Size of the header section 40 x size of the data section of one report data set 83317 bytes 40 report data sets is the maximum number of report data sets that can be written in the internal memory If there are more than 40 data sets they are cleared starting with the oldest data set Note e When the measurement and computation channel data enter the condition described in the following table status E and O are output in the report Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over range O Negative over range O Over range occurs when the input type is voltage and the in
251. input Processing Cut off reading of less than one minute hh 00 00 to hh 01 59 E e g 10 00 50 is corrected as 10 00 00 Round up reading of less than one minute e g 10 59 50 is corrected as 11 00 00 hh 02 00 to hh 57 59 No process is to be performed hh 58 00 to hh 59 59 e Start stop of computation rising and falling edge M1 option Reset of computation data trigger 250 ms or longer M1 option Manual sampling trigger 250 ms or longer Writing messages Up to 8 different messages can be set trigger 250 ms or longer Load of setting parameters Up to 3 setup data files can be set trigger 250 ms or longer suoneoiyioeds 14 13 14 7 General Specifications Construction Material Case Color Installing Dimensions Weight Standard Performance Case drawn steel Bezel polycarbonate Case Ice white Munsell 6 6Y 7 9 0 5 or equivalent Bezel Ice white Munsell 6 6Y 7 9 0 5 or equivalent Standing on its front feet the RD MV200 can be inclined backwards up to 10 degrees from a horizontal plane 281 W x 338 H x 252 D mm RD MV204 approx 6 5 kg RD MV208 approx 6 8 kg RD MV210 approx 6 5 kg RD MV220 approx 6 8 kg RD MV230 approx 7 0 kg Measuring Accuracy The following specifications apply to operation of the RD MV200 under standard operation conditions Temperature 23 2 C Humidity 55 10 RH Power supply voltage 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC
252. int The initial setting is 0 Trigger type for the event data When Trigger or Rotate is selected the trigger type is selected by turning each type of trigger ON OFF of the conditions The triggers operate in an OR fashion the trigger is activated when any that are turned ON are satisfied Type Description Key trigger External trigger Alarm trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when the FUNC Trigger soft key is pressed The trigger condition is satisfied when the external contact specified by Remote Control function is turned ON See section 10 9 The trigger condition is satisfied when any of the alarms occur 8 5 wnp n abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Number of data points that can be acquired and sampling length the maximum auto save interval for display data the maximum data length for event data This section describes the number of data points of the display data event data that can be acquired and the sampling length Use the information when determining the amount of time it takes for the internal memory to become full or when deciding the channels to be acquired or the sampling interval The possible range of menus of the auto save interval of display data and the data length of event data is displayed in the soft keys based on the information described here Data format The display data have minimum and
253. ion in chapter 12 Troubleshooting e Turn ON the power switch let the RD MV200 warm up for at least 30 minutes and then start the measurements 3 4 3 3 Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium Procedure This section describes the procedures to insert and remove the external storage medium Three types of media can be used depending on the specification e Model RD MV2xx 1 Floppy disk e Model RD MV2xx 2 Zip disk e Model RD MV2xx 3 ATA flash memory card For the handling procedure of the storage medium see section 2 1 Note If you are using the compact flash card on RD MV200s with the ATA flash memory card driver be careful of the static electricity The RD MV200 may not operate properly if you touch the compact flash card that is inserted into the recorder when there is static electricity on your body Inserting the storage medium 1 Insert the medium into the drive until a click is heard 2 Pressing the MEDIA key causes the RD MV200 to detect the existence of an external storage medium in the drive If the storage medium is detected an external storage medium icon is displayed in the status display section of the screen Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card Removing the storage medium Floppy disks and ATA flash memory cards can be removed from the drive regardless of whether the RD MV200 is turned ON or OFF Zip disks cannot be removed when the RD MV200 is turned OFF 1 If the RD MV200
254. ions 7 1 and 7 2 Set the channel display color See section 7 8 Use zone display See section 7 9 Set the number of scale divisions See section 7 10 11 1 Overview of the Computation Function Rolling average Alarm Set the base position of the bar graph See section 7 10 Specify the scale display position See section 7 10 Use partial expansion display See sections 7 11 and 7 12 Numerical display The range of displayed values of computed data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel However special displays are used for cases given in the table below Data Condition Computation Display The computed result exceeds 99999999 positive over display range XxXxXxXXxXxX The computed result is below 9999999 negative over display range XXXXXXX The value exceeds 3 4E 38 or is below overflow XXXXXKX OF 3 4E 38 in the middle of computation XXXXKKK An error is detected error XXKKKKKK When the following computation is specified a computation error occurs X 0 SQR X LOG X When a skipped channel No is entered in the equation The number of stacks see section 11 2 stack over XXXXXXX in the equation exceeds 17 The moving average of the computed result of the equation specified for the computation channel i
255. is determined by the scale lower limit setting n 100 Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select YES using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key For the range and measurable range see section 5 1 Voltage Input Setting Computing equation The RD MV200 uses the following square root computation Using the following definitions Vmin Vmax Fmin Fmax Vx EX Lower limit of span Upper limit of span Lower limit of scale Upper limit of scale Input voltage Scaling value Fx Fmar Fma fd a Fim V max Vmin When the value inside the square root is negative when Fmin lt Fmax xxxxx or when Fmin gt Fmax xxxxx is displayed 5 12 5 7 Skip Setting Procedure These channels will not be measured or displayed The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the
256. is reset to zero e When the data are divided and saved over multiple external storage media due to lack of space on the storage medium the same directory name is used e Ifthe specified directory already exists in the external storage medium an error message is displayed and the operation terminates data are not saved When using auto save Procedure Data are automatically stored by leaving the external storage medium inserted in the drive For the data storage operation see section 8 4 Note For the memory usage display of the internal memory see section 4 2 To check the free space on the storage medium see section 9 5 For the name of the directory in which the data are saved see section 8 9 When the external storage medium does not have enough space Replace the storage medium that is inserted in the drive 1 The message Not enough free space on media appears Change the external storage medium The unsaved data are saved to the external storage medium at the time for the next auto save execution Note ____ Be aware that data in the internal memory will be overwritten if there is not enough free space on the external storage medium or if the storage medium is not inserted in the drive in the following cases When the number of display data files exceeds 16 A file is created for each auto save interval see section 8 8 When the event data are acquired to the internal memory in the free run mode and t
257. is turned ON check that the storage medium is not being accessed Note The access lamp is lit while the storage medium is being accessed A message Data are being saved to the medium is displayed while measured computed data are being saved to the medium 3 5 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SWEN 7 3 3_Inserting Removing the External Storage Medium 2 Push the eject button to remove the storage medium The storage medium icon in the status display section disappears Floppy disk Zip disk ATA flash memory card Note If the key lock function for the storage medium is engaged the Zip disk cannot be ejected even if the eject button is pressed Release the key lock before attempting to eject the Zip disk Procedure when the Zip disk cannot be ejected If the Zip disk cannot be removed by performing the steps given in the Removing the storage medium section carry out the following steps to remove it 1 Open the front cover by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling forward 2 Insert a pin of approx 1 mm in diameter into the eject button hole and press slowly This will cause the Zip disk to be ejected Eject button of the Zip drive Zip disk eject hole Pin y Formatting external storage media Format the external storage medium before use The external storage medium is formatted to the following types using the RD MV200 Explanation
258. isition and the time period during which to acquire the data event data file size Example 3 Continuously record detailed data Select even data only Select Free for the mode Example 4 Recording is not necessary under normal circumstances Only record detailed data around the alarm incident Select event data only Select Trigger or Rotate for the mode Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisition and the time period during which to acquire the data Select display data only display data and event data or event data only Channels to be stored Data acquisition Select the channels to be acquired from measurement and computation channels Display data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to display data only or display data and event data Data acquisition starts when the START key is pressed and stops when the STOP key is pressed The display data are overwritten when the display data storage area in the internal memory becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 The number of display data files The number of display data files is equivalent to the number of times the data acquisition is started stopped or the number of files that are segmented by the auto save interval during auto save For details related to the manual save and auto save see section 8 4 Note The display data in the internal memory can be con
259. isition is in progress even when it is in the trigger wait state The trigger wait state can be identified using the bar graph described in item 6 4 2 4 2 Using the Status Display Section 5 The usage condition of the display data storage area in the internal memory This is displayed when display data acquisition is enabled Bar graph Displays the used space of the display data storage area e Time period The remaining time for acquiring the display data When the remaining time is less than one hour the time is displayed in units of minutes Remaining time Unit Note Greater than or equal to 100 days Percentage of the remaining area with respect to the display data storage area Greater than or equal to 100 hours days unit less than one day is rounded off less than 100 days Greater than or equal to 60 minutes hours unit less than one hour is rounded off less than 100 hours Less than 60 minutes minutes unit less than one minute is rounded off n 16 The maximum number of display data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 16 represents this value n represents the number of files in the internal memory One file contains data that are acquired between start and stop operations su 195 uopesado BulyosyMs gt Note The display data are overwritten for the following cases Be aware of these cases because data that are overwritten are lost When the dis
260. isplay data Maximum number of data points 900 000 2 CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 112 500 However since 75 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 75 000 Display rate When set to 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 75 000 data points x 60 s 4 500 000 s approx 52 days Event data Maximum number of data points 300 000 2 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 75 000 However since 30 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 30 000 data points When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 30 000 data points x 1 s 30 000 s approx 8 hours Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 900 000 12 CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 9 375 Display rate When set to 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 9 375 data points x 60 s 562 500 s approx 6 5 days Event data Maximum number of data points 300 000 12 CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 6 250 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 6 250 data points x 1 s 6 250 s approx 1 7 hours 8 3 Function to Acquire Other Data Manual sampled data When the manual sample key is pressed the instantaneous values of all channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off are acquired
261. isplay direction of the trend 1 Direction Trend Select horizontal or vertical Set the display direction of the bar graph 2 Direction Bar graph Select horizontal or vertical 7 23 Aejdsig y Buneiado pue Huas 7 13 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid and Scroll time Explanation Set the background color 3 Background Select white or black Note The background color of the historical trend is opposite that of the trend display Setting the trend line width 4 Trend line Select the width of the trend line as 1 2 or 3 dots Setting the width of the trip line 5 Trip line Select the width of the trip line as 1 2 or 3 dots Setting the number of grids on the waveform display area 6 Grid Select the number of grids from 4 to 12 Setting the interval at which the displayed group is automatically switched T Scroll time Select the interval from 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Grid on the waveform display area Grid The number of grid is 10 7 24 7 14 Setting the Brightness of the Screen and the Backlight Saver Function Procedure There are four screen brightness settin
262. its 2 7 digits Multiplier 2000 digits 0 000 to 2 000 4000 digits 1 000 to 5 000 V 0 5 Accuracy during scaling 7 digits x 0 5 2 6 digits rounded up Reference junction compensation Internal External selectable for each channel Reference junction compensation accuracy above 0 C Types R S B W 41 C Types K J E T N L U 0 5 C Maximum allowable input voltage 10 V DC continuous for ranges of 2 V or less and TC ranges 30 V DC continuous for 6 VDC and 20 VDC ranges Input resistance Approximately 10 MQ or more for ranges of 2 V DC or less and TC Approximately 1 MQ for 6 VDC and 20 VDC ranges Input source resistance Volt TC 2 KQ or less RTD 10 Q or less per wire The resistance of all three wires must be equal Input bias current 10 nA or less Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Maximum noise voltage between channels 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Interference between channels 120 dB when the input source resistance is 500 Q and the inputs to other channels are 30 V Common mode rejection ratio 120 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 500 Q imbalance between the minus terminal and ground Normal mode rejection ratio 40 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC automatic switching 12 VDC for 12 VDC power supply model Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC 10 to 18 VDC for 12 VDC power supply model Rated power supply frequency
263. its are equal See sections 5 5 and 5 6 30 The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span See section 7 11 31 Partial expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel See Communication Interface User s Manual 35 The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal See section 7 9 36 The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper limit See section 7 9 37 The display band is narrower than 4 of the entire display See section 7 9 40 Incorrect group set character string See section 7 6 41 There is no specified input channel See Communication Interface User s Manual 42 Exceeded the number of channels which can be set See Communication Interface User s Manual 43 A channel number cannot repeat in a group See section 7 6 45 There is no character string saved in the clipboard Copy a character string to the clipboard 46 The character string saved in the clipboard is too long Paste a character string with the specified number of characters 61 There is no channel specified by the MATH expression See section 11 4 62 MATH expression grammar is incorrect See section 11 2 63 MATH expression sequence is incorrect See section 11 2 64 MATH upper and lower span values are equal See section 11 4 70 The range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 11 4 71 Set range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 11 6 81 All space or quit string cannot be specified See section 10 6
264. key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 User name userl User ID E 4 Awindow appears for you to enter the password Enter the password and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 User name useri The user name is displayed in the status display section User name DISP 2hour 4 16 Logging out 1 Press the FUNC key The Logout soft key is displayed 2 Press the Logout soft key The user name shown in the status display section disappears Co 10 6 10 5 Using the Key Login Logout Function Explanation Auto logout This function is available in the operation mode If there is no key operation for ten minutes the user is automatically logged out The auto logout function can be activated in the basic setting mode Power up operation Power ON i Log out status Logout operation Login operation or FUNC key Auto logout Password User ID Operation mode When the basic setting mode is terminated When the basic setting mode is terminated and the mode returns to the operation mode the RD MV200 is in the logged out condition Saving the user name The user name is stored to the display and event data files at the following points when the display or event data acquisition starts and ends and when a message is written
265. l TAG 83 2l D TAG B3 2l Jan 01 2000 82 36 48 Jan 01 2008 82 36 17 Jan 01 2000 82 35 46 Jan 01 2000 82 37 88 Jan 01 2888 82 36 37 Jan 01 2088 82 36 86 j Mark see section 6 1 Number of alarms You can set up to four alarms for each channel Alarm conditions The following eight conditions are available Upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the alarm value Lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value falls below the alarm value Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Measured Alarm occurrence alarm value computed data Alarm release i H Alarm release a alarm value Measured computed data Alarm occurrence 1 22 1 5 Alarm Function Delay upper limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Delay lower limit alarm An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Delay upper limit alarm example T is the specified delay period Measured computed data 1 X4 Alarm value Alarm occurrence Alarm release Alarm does not occur at T1 because the time period is shorter than the specified delay period T The input exceeds the alarm value at X2 but the alarm occurs at X3 at which the specified delay period elapses the time when the alarm occurs is the time at X3
266. l digital displays groups 1 through 4 ALL BAR All bar graph displays groups 1 through 4 For the operating procedure see section 4 7 Example of a MIX display Digital display of group 1 Overview display GROUP 1 TAG B1 9 969 TAG B4 9 551 Pea TAG 51 i 0 TATAG 12 TAG 22 BA c BO ny ee 13 ETAG 33 TAG 82 TAG 05 TAG B4 TAG 14 TAG 24 H 0 483 1 030 DOOD Dag pH TAG 83 TAG 86 ABITAG 58 0 034 1 438 4g TAG 59 y TAG 18 TAG 2ajTAG 3a TAG 40 TE GROUP 1 Bar graph display of group 1 Trend display of group 1 SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 3 Display Function Historical Trend The display data and event data of the measured computed data stored in the internal memory or external storage medium are displayed as a historical trend For details related to the display data see Trend Display in this section For details related to the event data see section 1 4 Alarms and scales are not displayed on the historical trend display Methods used to display the historical trend e The following four methods are available in displaying the historical trend of the display data or event data in the internal memory e Display from the alarm summary For the operating procedure see section 4 5 e Display from the message summary For the oper
267. l input the value obtained by subtracting the measured value of another channel this channel is called a reference channel from the input signal of the channel set to compute the difference is displayed as the measured value of that channel When the input type is set to DC voltage the square root of the input signal of the channel set to compute the square root is displayed as the measured value of that channel The computed result can be scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and displayed When the input type is set to DC voltage thermocouple RTD or digital input the input signal can be converted to a value in the appropriate unit desired and displayed Channels that are not measured They are not displayed 1 Notation used by the RD MV200 to represent the input modes It is used when setting the measurement channels 2 This is optional 3 This item defines the type of signals that can be connected to the input terminal when the input mode is set to Difference Square root or Scaling The description of the input types DC voltage Thermocouple Resistive temperature detector and Digital input are the same as the descriptions given for the input modes DC voltage Thermocouple Resistive temperature detector and Digital input respectively 1 2 1 2 Functions of the Input Section If the signal t
268. l memory are displayed For models that have the alarm output relays option the ON OFF state of the relays are also listed For details related to the data residing in the internal memory see section 1 4 By selecting the display data file or event data file using the arrow keys the historical trend display can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of data sets in the internal memory The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date and time the last data were acquired H SAMPLE DATA 83 50 Jan 81 2000 00 12 40 Status of alarm output relays RELAY 1 000000 2 0000 Activated TLOG DATA B0B 400 3 000000 Red REPORT DATA B4 40 Jan 1 2008 00 14 50 Green Released SAMPLE DATA DISPLAY DATA EVENT DATA Selection of the file type to be Start Time End Time Data Factor displayed display data files or Jan 01 2008 00 25 04 Jan 61 2000 00 27 54 86 Sanpling event data files Jan 01 2008 80 15 04 Jan 61 2008 00 25 82 300 Auto Save Jan 81 2008 00 14 16 Jan 01 2008 00 14 48 17 Stop Jan 01 2008 00 11 24 Jan 1 2000 00 12 54 46 Stop _ Jan 01 2000 00 10 48 Jan 1 2008 68 11 84 9 Stop Jan 01 2088 00 05 44 Jan 81 2008 00 10 48 149 Stop T Cursor Date and time the data File status acquisition ended Date and time the data a
269. l omega com FAX 001 203 359 7807 info omega com mx Servicing Europe Postbus 8034 1180 LA Amstelveen The Netherlands TEL 31 0 20 3472121 FAX 31 0 20 6434643 Toll Free in Benelux 0800 0993344 e mail nl omega com Rud arm dy 1868 733 01 Karvin 8 TEL 420 0 69 6311899 FAX 420 0 69 6311114 Toll Free 0800 1 66342 e mail czech omega com 9 rue Denis Papin 78190 Trappes TEL 33 0 130 621 400 FAX 33 0 130 699 120 Toll Free in France 0800 4 06342 e mail france omega com Daimlerstrasse 26 D 75392 Deckenpfronn Germany TEL 49 0 7056 9398 0 FAX 49 0 7056 9398 29 Toll Free in Germany 0800 639 7678 e mail germany omega com One Omega Drive River Bend Technology Centre Northbank Irlam Manchester M44 5EX United Kingdom TEL 44 0 161 777 6611 FAX 44 0 161 777 6622 Toll Free in United Kingdom 0800 488 488 e mail sales omega co uk It is the policy of OMEGA to comply with all worldwide safety and EMC EMI regulations that apply OMEGA is constantly pursuing certification of its products to the European New Approach Directives OMEGA will add the CE mark to every appropriate device upon certification The information contained in this document is believed to be correct but OMEGA Engineering Inc accepts no liability for any errors it contains and reserves the right to alter specifications without notice WARNING These products are not designed for use in and should not be used for patie
270. l storage medium Displays a list of files and the amount of free space on the external storage medium in the setting mode only Deletes files and directories on the external storage medium Formats the external storage medium Display the list of files and the free space on the external storage medium in the setting mode Procedure A list of files on the external storage medium can be displayed In addition the amount of free space is also displayed e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press ew Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press soft key to display the File list screen File list Directory name File name Time 16188898 DHR 2000 01 01 80 89 B s 10100090 DDS 2000 01 01 00 09 B 10100160 DHR 2000 01 01 00 16 10100100 DDS 2000 01 01 80 16 TRASH 16188346 DDS 2000 01 01 8 34 J 16188348 DEY 2000 01 81 80 34 10100538 DHR 2000 01 01 88 53 16188438 DDS 2000 01 01 00 54 16188436 DEY 2000 01 01 00 54 10100400 DHR 2000 01 01 00 48 16188358 DDS 2000 01 01 80 48 16188538 DEY 2000 01 01 00 54 16188546 DHR 2000 01 81 00 54 10100540 DDS 2000 01 01 00 54 Free space 10100540 DEY 2000 01 01 00 54 93412 Kbytes 19199568 DHR 2000 81 81 80 56 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed Using th
271. lay reflash on option Approx 500 ms Approx 500 ms z 101 output Alarm relay status Output relay put reflash off option Note If the reflash alarm is specified relays 101 to 103 are used as reflash relays regardless of the number of alarm output relays Therefore relays 101 to 103 operate as OR logic see AND OR of alarm output relays and non hold see Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay regardless of the settings made in AND OR of alarm output relays and Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay Relays 111 112 113 are used for models without 101 to 106 suuely Humas pue Huibpe mouyoy H 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function Basic Setting Mode AND OR of alarm output relays When sharing an alarm output relay among multiple alarms you can select from the following conditions that cause the alarm output relay to be activated e AND Activated when all alarms are being generated simultaneously e OR Activated when at least one of the alarms is being generated Specify the alarm output relay to operate under the AND condition as in 101 first relay to Ixx where xx is the relay number The initial setting is set to None Channel 1 i i i Alarm status cwm A 7 LL i 1 i 7 j i AND eae Loi ae COetsiML Alarm relay status Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 1
272. les 9 5 Delete files 9 5 Save setup data 9 1 Load setup data 9 1 Delete files 9 5 Format external storage media 9 5 Format external storage media 9 5 The menu screen and items of the setting mode The menu screen and items of the setting mode are as follows Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections The Math set1 and Math set2 are displayed when the computation function M1 is equipped Set mode HEL fore e Alarm Tag Moving average Alarm Delay Trend Save interval Message File User key E visviay E Save Load Clear data EL Tine SC T i ath set 8 Nath set2 H 3 4 5 6 Next 1 2 Set node Nath set1 Expression Alarm Constant GRE Hath set2 Tas TL0G Rolling averase Alarn Delay Oon Batch set 1 2 3 4 5 Range Alarm Tag Moving average Alarm Delay Trend Save interval Nessage File User key Display Save Load Clear data Time To Display menu on the next page To Save Load Clear data menu on the next page 3 5 Configuring the Functions Display menu Display Group set Trip line 2 Color R Zone Graph Partial 4 View Direction LCD 5 Hath Color 6 Hath Zone Graph Partial 1 2 3 4 5 Save Load Clear data menu Save Load Clear data 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Save data 4 Load display data 5 Load e
273. ls 6 7 suuely Humas pue Huibpea mouyoy H 6 3 Setting the Alarm Delay Period Procedure Set the alarm delay period for delay upper lower limit alarm These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they change back to white Press w Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Setting on a computation channel option Twice press the softkey Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key 8 1 1 mm 2 First CH Last CH First CH Last CH irst as DE jer E 31 Tag r Tag Alarm Delay E J Tag J Time len O a r mo _ Count Off Timer No 1 Sum scale Off rRolling average On Off Alarm Delay Time ETI amp Off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Tag Moving Average or Filter for measurement channels and Tag TLOG or Rolling Average for computation channels are also simultaneously set 2 Alarm delay period Pr
274. ly on the RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 models with the computation option M1 If the screen is switched from the trend screen to another screen back to the trend screen the old waveform is cleared and the waveform from that point is displayed This is due to the memory capacity restriction of the internal memory and is not an abnormal behavior The acquired data are kept in the internal memory When waveform updating is stopped the waveform at that point remain displayed on the screen 4 10 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Explanation About group display and all channel display The group display of trend digital and bar graph and the all channel display of the trend are displayed in the following fashion see table below They depend on whether channels are assigned to the groups and whether the channels are set to display the trend and set to store the data Assigned to Trend Display Data Numerical Display Trend s Waveform Display Data Acquisition to the Groups Storage Specification Bar Graph Group All Channels Internal Memory Yes Yes Display Display Display Yes Yes No Display Don t display Don t display No No Yes Don t display Don t display Display Yes No No Don t display Don t display Don t display No 1 Whether or not the channel is assigned to a group 2 Whether or not the channel is set to display the trend and store the data 3 Numerical display refers to the numerical displ
275. mal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel However special displays are used for cases given in the table below Measurement channel Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Displayed value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN e When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value Positive over range 99999 minimum value Negative over range 99999 SUM When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Sum value e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Computation channel Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Displayed value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN e When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value When the minimum value is below 9999999 99999999 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the equation is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 SUM When all data are computation errors or Blank Sum value computa
276. maximum values for each sampling interval Event data consists of instantaneous values The number of data bytes per channel is shown in the following table Data Type Measurement Channel Computation Channel Display data 4 bytes channel 8 bytes channel Event data 2 bytes channel 4 bytes channel Example Data format when the data of measurement channels 1 to 4 and a computation channel 31 are acquired Display data 1st scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max 2nd scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min i max min i max min max to nth scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max 2 bytes binary data Event data 1st scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 2nd scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 to nth scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 WH 2 bytes binary data Internal memory capacity The capacity of the internal memory that is used for data storage is 1 2 MB The internal memory is allocated depending on the acquired data as follows Data being acquired Internal Memory Capacity Display data only 1 2 MB Display data and event data Display data 0 9 MB Event data 0 3 MB Event data only 1 2 MB 8 6 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Maximum number of data points per channel
277. mpensation RJC When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple the reference junction compensation can be used You can select whether to use the reference junction compensation provided by the RD MV200 or external reference junction compensation If you are using external reference junction compensation you will also set the reference voltage The initial setting is set so that the reference junction compensation provided by the RD MV200 is used For the setting procedure see section 5 9 Filter and Moving Average The filter and moving average are used to suppress the effects of noise that is riding on the signal Filtering is provided on the RD MV204 and RD MV208 Moving average is provided on the RD MV210 RD MV220 and RD MV230 The filter or moving average can be set on each channel For the setting procedure see section 5 8 Filter function RD MV204 and RD MV208 Suppresses the effects of noise above the frequency determined by the specified time constant The time constant can be set to 2 s 5s or 10s The filter is initially turned OFF Effects of using filter Output response fot a step input Input TN 63 2 of the output value Output response curve when using the filter 2 5 10s time constant the time it takes to reach 63 2 of the output value 1 3 SUONJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Moving Average RD MV210 RD MV220 and RD MV230 T
278. n corresponding 5 to the displayed screen D 1 714 2 000 is highlighted o 1769 A The screen is switched 2 using the arrow keys Display reference position the right end of the display range the position of the newest data being displayed Date and time at the display reference position Arrow keys can be used to scroll along the time axis The time axis can be expanded or reduced Date and time at the left end of the time axis Showing the all channel display returning to the group display On the group display the channels that are assigned to the group are displayed see section 7 6 On the all channel display the waveform of all channels that are set to display the trend see section 8 10 are displayed over the current group display See the explanation in section 4 3 This operation is carried out on the Historical Trend screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select ALL CHANNEL or GROUP CHANNEL using the up and down arrow keys Fee TREND a HISTORY ALL CHANNEL 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 21 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Changing the group on the display screen If all channel display is selected waveforms for all channels that are register
279. n the hour the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from an hour of data up to the current hour and written to the internal memory Daily report At the specified time everyday the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a day of data up to the specified time and written to the internal memory e Weekly report At the specified time of the specified day every week the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a week of data up to the specified time and written to the internal memory Monthly report At the specified time of the specified date every month the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a month of data up to the specified time and written to the internal memory The number days in a month may be 28 29 30 or 31 days depending on the month Report data display See section 4 5 Combinations of reports that can be created The reports created by the RD MV200 can be set to hourly only daily only daily and weekly or daily and monthly Number of measurement and computation channels that can be assigned to the report Up to 30 channels can be assigned to one report The report data are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off About the sum scale In the sum
280. nals AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 F1 R1 option Connect optional input output signal cables 6 VGA output terminal D5 option Connect an external monitor 7 Functional ground terminal Note See the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication interface user s manual M3643 to use Ethernet port and the serial interface port 3 3 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SeWeN 7 3 2 Turning ON OFF the Power Switch This section describes the procedures to turn ON OFF the power switch Procedure 1 Check the following points before turning ON the power switch The power cord are connected correctly to the RD MV200 The RD MV200 is connected to the correct power supply see section 2 8 The proper fuse is set See section 13 4 CAUTION If the input wires are connected in parallel with another instrument avoid turning ON OFF the RD MV200 or the other instrument when either one is in operation This may affect the reading 2 Turn the power switch ON After performing a self diagnosis for a few seconds a screen in the operation mode appears Note e If nothing is displayed when the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch and check the points listed in step 1 After checking the points turn ON the power switch again If the unit still does not work it is probably malfunctioning Contact Omega for repairs e If an error message is displayed on the screen take measures according to the descript
281. nce temperature detector 3 Range Set the type of thermocouple or RTD 5 3 sBuinjes jauueyo jusweinseoyy 7 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Explanation Measurable range The following table shows the mode range and measurable range Mode Range Measurable Range C Measurable Range F Note TC R 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 S 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 B 0 0 to 1820 0 C 32 to 3308 F ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 K 200 0 to 1370 0 C 328 to 2498 F ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 E 200 0 to 800 0 C 328 0 to 1472 0 F ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 J 200 0
282. nd all computations Memory terminate acquisition and Cancel Application name AP i SUPERVISOR gt SANPLE 019 Do you want to stop data storage l _Yes j o 2 Select Yes Mem Math or Memory for models with the computation function using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key to stop the data acquisition The icon in the status display section changes to a stop icon Note e One file is created for one set of start and stop operations The maximum number of files that can be stored in the internal memory is 16 When the memory area becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 existing data will be overwritten starting with the oldest data When a power disruption occurs the file is closed When the power resumes data are written to a new file Data acquisition can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands e The START STOP operation also starts stops the report function e When the computation is stopped it is started with the START key 8 12 8 6 Acquiring Event Data This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to Event or E D For setting the data acquisition method see sections 8 10 and 8 11 Procedure During Free mode Start data acquisition To begin data acquisition press the START key The icon in the status display section will change accordingly icon GROUP 1 Role onan 29 43 09 e
283. ng on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Setting on a computation channel option Press the soft key Next 1 2 To display the setting screen press the soft key Ooz ol 1 1 First CH Last CH First CH Last CH ja EE Eg Eg Tag Tay Alarm Delay ras 2 im s loving average r TLOG Count Off Timer No 1 Sum scale Off Alarm Delay sie Ws Rolling average On Off off The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here other parameters shown in the above figure are also simultaneously set 2 Tag Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the tag name Enter the tag name up to 16 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 7 1 Aejdsiq y Buneiado pue Huas 7 2 Selecting Tag Display or Channel Number Display Basic Setting Mode Procedure Select whether tags or channel numbers a
284. ng the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu 4 Select the screen to be assigned using the up and down arrow keys e When assigning the trend digital bar graph or information screen 5 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu 6 Select the group or screen using the up arrow key 7 The specified screen is assigned to the selected quadrant by pressing the DISP ENTER key To close the menu without assigning the screen press the ESC key When assigning the overview screen 5 The specified screen is assigned to the selected quadrant by pressing the DISP ENTER key To close the menu without assigning the screen press the ESC key 4 26 4 7 Using the 4 Screen Display Note The screen that can be assigned to the quadrants of the 4 screen display is trend all channel trend excluded digital bar graph overview alarm summary message summary and memory summary The following information is not displayed on the 4 screen display Measured computed values alarm type and cursor in the overview screen Scale on the trend screen Measured computed values upper lower limit of the display span and unit on the bar graph screen Cursor in the alarm summary message summary and memory summary xpanding one of the screens Display one screen on the entire screen 1 w Pressing the DISP ENTER key selects one screen the title section is displayed in dark blue of the four screens Select the screen t
285. ng the display update rate see section 7 3 Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed Information Description All channel display Waveforms of all channels that were set to display the trend are displayed on one trend screen Sections 4 3 and 8 10 Message display Messages specified by the user can be displayed at arbitrary points in time For example by displaying a message when a certain operation is carried out the point at which the operation is carried out can be seen visually Displayed messages are stored Sections 7 4 and 7 5 Display direction of waveforms The waveform can be displayed vertically or horizontally The vertical display is in the same direction as the chart recorder and is convenient when the RD MV200 is used with the chart recorder gt Section 7 13 Displayed color of waveforms The displayed color of waveforms can be specified for each channel The color also applies to the bar graph display gt Section 7 8 Thickness of waveform lines You can select from three types 1 2 or 3 dots The specified thickness of waveform lines applies to all channels Section 7 13 Trip line display Displays a line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line for each group You can select the thickness of the displayed line from three types 1 2 or 3 dots Up to four trip lines can be displayed on a single group Sections 7
286. ng the left arrow key the displayed group changes in the reverse order 4 25 su 19 5 uopesado BulyosyuMs gt 4 7 Using the 4 Screen Display Displays the screen name or group name TAG 84 TAG BITAG 11 TAG 21 TAG 41 TAG 51 8 969 0 551 A ITAG 12 TAG 22 TAG 32 TAG 42N EA ny TAG BSITAG 13 E TAG 33 TAG 43lTAG 53 TAG B4 TAG 14 TAG 24 TAG 34 TAG 44 TAG 54 TAG B6 TAG 26 TAG 36 TAG 46 TAG TAG B7 TAG 17 TAG 27 TAG 37 TAG 47 ATAG 18 TAG 28C TAG 48 TAG B9 TAG 19 TAG 29 TAG 39 TAG 49 Different screens can be assigned to each area quadrant DOOD Oo pH Changing the screen to be assigned to the 4 Screen display This operation is carried out on the 4 screen display 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key selects one screen the title section is displayed in dark blue of the four screens 2 Using the arrow keys select the quadrant for which the screen assignment is to be changed GROUP 1 1 0 898 897 2 112 22 l2 aa 52 HH 3 m a a a a g 2898 0 897 f fis i25 j amp 58 fl vf OE v r a r 157 s i 8 38 e 58 0 898 7 9 v via a The title section of 2 3 4 amp 4 ne the selected quadrant 898 displayed in dark blue 3 Pressi
287. ng up and down arrow keys PE overview PE overview JUMP TO TREND D Sp 5 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key JUMP TO BAR O 24 4 12 4 4 Using the Overview Screen Overview Screen The area corresponding to a channel on which an alarm is occurring is Alarm type displayed in red See section 6 1 Measured computed value The area corresponding to a channel Cursor can be moved on which an alarm is not occurring is using the arrow keys displayed in green See section 6 1 Tag Channel no z See section TAG 22 TAG 32 TAG 42 TAG 7 1 and 7 2 841 1 283 B 243737 B 781465 m cyril TAG 23 s 33 43 4 13 su 19 5 uopesado HuyIMS gt 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Operation Flow Diagram Screen rmenu Sub menu INFORMATION Screen menu Sub menu A A A gt an Y To HISTORICAL Information TREND selection MEMORY SUMMARY x gt gt gt To Report data When displaying Report data Screen menu Sub menu DISP ENTER key 4 lt gt Arrow keys Procedure Displaying the alarm summary message summary or memory summary 1 Pressing the D
288. nge back to white Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key oa l Alan _q Ref lash Mia 1 Relay AND None 2 Action Energize 3 Behavior Nonhold 4 Indicator Nonhold 5 Rate of change Increase 2 Decrease 2 g Hysteresis On The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting reflash 1 Reflash Select On or Off On Use reflash function Off Not use reflash function Setting the AND OR logic of output relays 2 Relay AND Select the relays that are to use the AND logic Set the last relay that is to use the AND logic The relays beyond this relay will use the OR logic Select from None 101 101 only I01 102 101 and 102 and I01 136 101 to 136 The setting is valid for relays specified by options Setting the output relay operation energized de energized 3 Relay Action Select energize or de energize using the soft key Setting the output relay operation hold non hold 4 Relay Behavior Select hold or non hold using the soft key When the alarm output relay option is not installed these settings are void Setting the alarm indication operation hold non hold 5 Indicator Select hold or non hold using the soft key 6 10 6 4 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm F
289. nnected Date and time when the access occurred FTP log For detail see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 005 005 Time No Code lag File Name F Jan 01 2000 01 50 22 282 HOSTNAME S 18181588 DDS Jan 01 2000 01 50 22 282 UNREACH P 18181588 DDS P P P Jan 01 2000 61 49 32 18181499 DDS File name Jan 01 2008 61 48 51 18101488 DDS Jan 81 2008 81 48 27 DX_FTPC TXT t FTP server P primary S secondary Error code Date and time when the file transfer was made System screen See section 1 8 10 11 suolpun4 48410 2 10 8 Setting the Memory End Relay Output Time F1 Option Basic Setting Mode Procedure This function activates the relay output when the remaining space time in the internal memory or storage medium becomes small Set the minimum storage time of the internal memory at which the relay should be activated The initial setting is 1 hour e This function is valid when the FAIL Memory End output relay F1 option is installed e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu
290. nt and the operator must refer to the User s Manual The symbol is used in the User s Manual to indicate the reference WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or death to the user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Note Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrument Notation regarding procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 11 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations EEE Represents contents that are displayed on the screen Example Volt t FO Ju Denotes the soft key that is used to make a selection on the setting and basic setting menus Follow the steps indicated with numbers The procedures are given with the premise that the user is carrying out the steps for the first time Explanation This section describes the setting parameters and the limitations regarding the procedures It does not give a detailed explanation of the function For detail on the function see chapter 1 viii Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 gt gt BBE BE Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Foreword eeeee Safety Precautions Checking the Contents of the Package scsi ccicccssccscessecctssstaccevsevecnesivasenerventeecetaevervatesasesvarcesentectedees iv How to Use thistMamwall sismis idii t
291. nt connected applications Foreword Th Th ank you for purchasing the Omega RD MV200 is User s Manual contains useful information about the functions installation wiring operating procedures and troubleshooting of the RD MV200 To ensure correct use please read these manuals thoroughly before operation Ke Th ep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises e following three manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the RD MV200 Notes Trademarks Revisions Manual Name Manual No Description RD MV200 User s Manual M3642 This manual Explains all functions and procedures of the RD MV200 excluding the communication functions RD MV100 RD MV200 M3643 Explains the communication functions of Communication the Ethernet serial interface Interface User s Manual RD MV100 RD MV200 M3644 Describes the functions and operating DAQSTANDARD Software procedures of DAQSTANDARD Software that comes with the package This manual describes the RD MV200 style number S3 The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the RD MV200 s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact Omega Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents
292. o 100 ms the scan interval is 2 s Setting the scan interval 2 Scan interval Input signals are scanned at every scan interval For the models with computation function M1 the computation carried out at every scan interval RD MV204 RD MV208 125 ms 250 ms RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 1 s 2 s when the A D integration time is 100 ms 2 s only Setting the thermocouple input burnout and setting the reference junction compensation This setting is void for all input settings other than the TC 3 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 5 15 sBuinjes jeuueyo jueweinseayy 7 5 9 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting Mode Explanation 4 Burnout Select from Off Up and Down Off Disable the burnout function Up When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to positive over range Xxxxx Down When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to negative over range xxxxx 5 RJC Set External or Internal External Use the external RJC Internal Use the RJC of the RD MV200 6 Volt uV If External is selected set the reference junction compensation voltage to add to the input Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the voltage Enter a value 20000 uV to 20000 uV initial value is 0 uV and p
293. o be expanded using the arrow keys Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu Select EXPAND using the up and down arrow keys or e Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu EXPAND is selected in the sub menu izo INFOR F HATION Fel Ss ol Pressing the DISP ENTER key expand the specified screen To close the menu without expanding the screen press the ESC key 4 27 su 19 5 uopesado BulyosyuMs gt Chapter 5 Measurement Channel Settings 5 1 Voltage Input Setting To measure the DC voltage input or the DC current input using an external shunt resistor follow the procedures below to set the voltage input The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key oa l 1 m First CH Last CH jar Jer Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper a aoa 1 800 2 3 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the
294. o be measured is a DC current a shunt resistance is attached to the input terminal to convert the current signal to a voltage signal The input mode is set to DC voltage in this case For the various types of shunt resistors and the procedure related to setting the current input see section 5 1 Input Range and Measurable Range Burnout You can select the Input range that is appropriate for the input signal for DC voltage Thermocouple RTD and digital input For example R S B K E J T N W L and U are available input ranges for Thermocouple For each Input range a measurable range is defined for example the measurable range for R of Thermocouple is 0 0 C to 1760 C For details see section 14 1 When measuring temperature using a thermocouple and the thermocouple burns out you can specify the measurement result to be set to positive over range or negative over range Burnout can be set on each measurement channel The initial setting is set so that burnout is not indicated For the setting procedure see section 5 9 1 Positive over range is a condition in which the input signal is over the upper limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as XxXxXxXx 2 Negative over range is a condition in which the input signal is below the lower limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as kxxxXx Reference junction co
295. ode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key O8 Trend Save interval Time diy Imin futo save interval EE 1 1 Auto save interval Displayed when auto save is selected See section 8 8 Select from the choices shown on the soft keys Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 8 18 8 8 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data Explanation Choices for the auto save interval The maximum auto save interval varies depending on the display update rate sampling interval is determined from the display update rate the data type display data only display data and event data and the number of measurement and computation channels to be stored see section 8 10 The available choices for the auto save interval are displayed on the soft key See the table below Display update 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 4h rat
296. of the AC adapter or the power cord Also do not let heat generating objects come in contact with them When unplugging the power cord do not pull on the power cord Always hold the plug If the power cord becomes damaged contact your nearest representative listed on the back cover of this manual Connecting Procedure 1 Check that the power switch is turned OFF 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC adapter jack on RD MV200 Install the clamp filter standard accessory near RD MV200 of power cord 3 Connect the power cord plug that came with the AC adapter to the power supply connector of the AC adapter 4 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to a power outlet meeting the following specifications The power outlet should be a three pole type with a protective grounding terminal Rated power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Operating supply voltage range 90 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Maximum power consumption 103 VA AC adapter rated output voltage 12 VDC AC adapter maximum rated output current 2 6 A Functional grounding When using the AC adapter noise may be reduced if the functional ground terminal is connected to the earth ground Use the functional ground terminal as necessary 2 15 OOZAIN GY 24 Bursn 21049 2 8 Power Supply Wiring Using the accessory DC power terminal connector Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument A WARNI
297. oints x 60 s 6 000 000 s approx 69 days Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 12 CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 12 500 Display rate When set to 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 12 500 data points x 60 s 750 000 s approx 8 days Event data only Measurement channel 2 computation channel None Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 2 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 300 000 However since 120 000 data points is the limit Maximum number of data points 120 000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 120 000 data points x 1 s 120 000 s approx 33 hours Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length Event data Maximum number of data points 1 200 000 12 CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 25 000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 25 000 data points x 1 s 25 000 s approx 7 hours 8 7 winipay abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 2 Function to Acquire Display Data and Event Data Display data and event data Measurement channel 2 computation channel none Data Maximum number of data points and sampling length D
298. on Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press soft key to display the Load event data screen Load event data Directory name File name Time 10401540 DEV 2000 01 84 81 56 DATA23 16462668 DEY 2008 61 84 62 89 16462898 DEY 2000 01 04 82 11 16482138 DEY 2088 81 84 82 13 16482198 DEV 2008 01 04 62 20 18482218 DEY 2000 01 84 82 21 rm DEV 2008 81 84 82 24 10402258 DEY 2000 01 04 82 28 Batch Time File name Batch name No 10401540 DEV SAHPLE 2a18 10402068 DEV SAMPLE 813 10402090 DEY SAMPLE 0014 Maano12a NEU 1 The directories in the external storage medium are displayed in the Directory name column Press the up or down arrow key to select the directory containing the event data to be loaded A list of files in the selected directory is displayed in the right column Root directory is denoted by 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor on to the file list Press the up or arrow key to select the event data file to be loaded To move back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the waveform on the historical trend screen To return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen without displaying the historical trend press the ESC key 9 7 eyeq Bulzijeniuy pue sayi4 Buibeuew fa 9 5 Managing files Displaying free space on the externa
299. on and Report Function M1 Option Report Function The report function is one of the functions provided by the optional computation function M1 This function computes the average maximum minimum and sum for the specified channels at specified intervals and writes the result to the internal memory You can select the report type from hourly reports only daily reports only daily and weekly reports and daily and monthly reports The reports are created every hour on the hour for hourly reports at the specified hour on the hour for daily reports once a day at the specified hour on the hour on the specified day for weekly reports once a week and at the specified hour on the hour on the specified date for monthly reports once a month For example in the case of daily reports the average maximum minimum and sum over a day for the specified channels are computed at the specified time on the hour and the results are acquired to the internal memory This constitutes one report data set The report data residing in the memory can be displayed on the RD MV200 s LCD see section 1 3 Display Function In addition the report data residing in the internal memory can be saved to an external storage medium section 1 4 Storage Function Because the report data are saved to the external storage medium in ASCII format spreadsheet applications can be used to view the data see appendix 2 Data Format of ASCII Files
300. on to exit the basic setting mode and returns to the basic setting mode menu In this case the setting changes made up to that point are held Key operations in the setting mode Procedure Entering the setting mode 1 Press the MENU key to enter the setting mode 2 Press the soft key to enter individual setting screens Common key operations in the setting mode are described First CH Last CH fa ja r Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper Cursor position AA x oa 1 080 blue r Alarm Relay Type Value On Off Number 1 On TH B 688 On Ma 2 Off 3 of 4 Off Skip Volt TC RTD Scale Delta Next 1 2 Setting selections selected using the soft keys 3 20 3 6 Common Key Operations Selecting the parameter 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The available selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen above the soft keys 2 Select the parameter with the soft key The box containing the parameter that was changed turns yellow The cursor moves to the next parameter To cancel the settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Confirming the settings 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key confirms the new settings The parameter boxes return to a white color The cursor moves to the first parameter on the page Returning to the menu screen of the setting mode 1 Press
301. ons selected using the soft keys suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 6 Common Key Operations Selecting the parameter 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The available selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen above the soft keys 2 Select the parameter with the soft key The box containing the parameter that was changed turns yellow The cursor moves to the next parameter To cancel the settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Confirming the settings 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key confirms the new settings The parameter boxes return to a white color The cursor moves to the first parameter on the page Returning to the menu screen of the basic setting mode 1 Press the ESC key to return to the menu screen of the basic setting mode Saving the settings and returning to the operation mode 1 Press the END soft key A confirmation window with a message Do you want to store and make the new settings take effect appears 2 Selecting Yes with the arrow key and pressing the DISP ENTER key saves the new settings and returns to the operation mode If you do not wish to save the new settings select No with the arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key to return to the operation mode Selecting Cancel with the arrow key and pressing the DISP ENTER key cancels the operati
302. onstant 10 s Moving Average Off Do not use moving average 2to16 Number of data samples for the moving average 5 14 5 9 Setting the A D Integration Time Scan Interval Burnout and Reference Junction Compensation Basic Setting Mode Set the integration time of the A D converter scan interval thermocouple input burnout and reference junction compensation RJC Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Oo l A D Integrate MA1 Scan interval ls 2 First CH Jar Burnout set RJC Volt lt ul The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the integration time of the A D converter i Integrate Select from Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz and 100 ms using soft keys RD MV204 RD MV208 Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz 100 ms Auto automatically switches 20 16 7 ms 50 Hz fixed to 20 ms 60 Hz fixed to 16 7 ms 100 ms fixed t
303. open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the remote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high 1 32 1 8 Other Functions Daylight Savings Time e When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled the RD MV200 automatically sets the clock ahead by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on June 1 the time is set ahead to 10 o clock June 1 When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled the RD MV200 automatically sets the clock back by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on December 1 the time is set back to 8 o clock December 1 For the setting procedure see section 10 14 SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 Temperature Unit The temperature unit can be set to Celsius C or Fahrenheit F This applies to all channels For the setting procedure see section 10 15 VGA Output Terminal D5 option By using the RGB output the RD MV200 s screen can be displayed on a VGA monitor or multi sync monitor that can display VGA For the operating procedure see section 21 1 33 Chapter 2 Before Using the RD MV200 2 1 Precautions on the Use of the RD MV200 Read the following precautions before using the RD MV200 and the external storage medium floppy disk zip disk ATA flash memory card
304. or calculating 512 Because memory save is manual mode FTP is not available 520 Connecting to the line 521 The data file is being transferred 551 FTP test is being executed Cautions Code Message Ref section 600 Measured data and Settings have been initialized 601 Measured data have been initialized 610 This username is already registered See section 10 6 611 There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode See section 10 6 System Errors Servicing is required when a system error occurs Contact Omega Code Message 901 ROM failure 902 RAM failure 910 A D memory failure for all input channels 911 Channel 1 A D memory failure 912 Channel 2 A D memory failure 913 Channel 3 A D memory failure 914 Channel 4 A D memory failure 921 Channel 1 A D calibration value error 922 Channel 2 A D calibration value error 923 Channel 3 A D calibration value error 924 Channel 4 A D calibration value error 930 Memory acquisition failure 940 The Ethernet module is down 12 7 Bunooys jqnorL D 12 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Nothing is displayed Is the power switch on NO Turn on the power proper Does the switch work properly S P propery See section 3 2 YES Is the power supply NO gt connected properly Connect properly See section 2 7 YES NO Supply the power at the specified
305. or messages Operation guide screens confirmation screen that appears when the STOP key is pressed or the selection screen that appears when exiting the basic setting mode for example For the setting procedure see section 10 10 SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 FAIL Memory End Function F1 option Operation at System Failure This function activates the relay output when the CPU fails The relay is de energized if the CPU fails This relay action cannot be reversed to energized on failure and thus this relay is de energized also upon power off including a power failure Relay behavior De energized on Failure NI LA LS NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Normal Failure Power off NO C and NC denote normally opened common and normally closed respectively Operation at Memory end This function activates the relay output when the remaining space time in the internal memory or the external storage medium becomes small The relay is energized if the memory end is detected The relay action cannot be reversed to de energized on memory end When the relay is energized save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium during manual save or use another external storage medium during auto save The memory end detection operates as follows When using auto save When using auto save and the storage medium is inserted the relay is energized when the remaining space on the storage medium falls to 10 At this point th
306. ormats the external storage medium The function is the same as that in the basic setting mode These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press ew Press soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press soft key to display the Format screen Format Volume name Type Quick 1 To change the volume name after formatting enter the new volume name Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string up to 11 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Note The following character combinations cannot be used as volume names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK All spaces are not allowed for volume names Spaces at the top or in the middle of a character string are also not allowed 2 Select Quick or Normal to set in the Type box To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu press the ESC key 3 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays a confirmation window Pressing the DISP ENTER key formats the medium Type Quick Performs only a logical format Normal Performs both a physical format and a logical format Format type Floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB Zip disk FDISK 1 partition har
307. os D 12 1 A List of Messages Code Message 283 FTP command was not accepted Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283 Character String and Details USER Failed user name verification Check the user name setting PASS Failed password verification Check the password setting ACCT Failed account verification Check the account setting TYPE Failed to change the transfer type Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode CWD Failed to change the directory Check the initial path setting PORT Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the security function is disabled PASV Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the server supports PASV commands SCAN Failed to read the transfer connection settings Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server 284 FTP transfer setting error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284 Character String and Details MODE Internal processing error LOCAL Internal processing error REMOTE The destination file name is not correct Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files ABORT File transfer abort was requested by the server Check the server for the reason for the abort request 12 4 12 1 A List of Messages Code Message 285 FTP data connection error Further
308. out switching the screen press the ESC key Scrolling the waveform Pressing the left or right arrow key horizontal display or the up or down arrow key vertical display while displaying the historical trend scrolls the waveform along the time axis pecifying the displayed position with the cursor The cursor position on the all data display locates the display reference position Enclosed in parentheses are for the vertical trend display 1 Pressing the up right arrow key displays the all data display in the upper right section of the screen 4 22 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Cursor Move the cursor using the arrow keys to select the displayed position Display all the data Displays the The cursor position becomes the entire display data in the file display reference position see below 0 551 2 000 8 584 2 000 C TAG 82 0 034 2 000 0 069 2 000 LZH TAG B3 0 483 2 008 8 449 2 000 cn TAG 84 8 969 2 088 8 938 2 000 ny TAG 05 1 389 2 000 1 363 2 008 pH 1 714 2 088 1 696 2 000 y Display reference position 2 Move the cursor to select the displayed position using the up and left and right up and down arrow keys 3 Pressing the down left arrow key switches to the historical trend screen with shifted waveforms Display the current trend data and the historical trend data This is possible only when the historical trend of the display data is being displayed Display
309. perature Unit Basic Setting Mode cceceeeseeeeeeeneeeeereeeeeeneeeneees 10 24 Chapter 11 Computation Report Function Option 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 Overview of the Computation FUNCTION eecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeseaeeteneseneeeeaees 11 1 Explanation of Computing EQuations asirar arsine access hee 11 4 Using the Computation FUNGON sisitna erra a iaaa L raais ii aatas 11 8 Setting Computation Channels 00 eeeeeseeseceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeaeessaeeeeeeeaeeeseeseaeessaeeeneeseaees 11 10 Setting the Alarm Setting Constants TLOG Computation Setting the Timer Number and Sum Scale for TLOG Computation eee 11 18 Setting the Timer Basic Setting Mode Using the Rolling Average sisri ainese oaaae dices S Overview of the Report FUNCHOM v2 2 c cciccsecserecreesenter avion a a Using the Report Function ecceseeereeeeeeteeenees Setting the Report Function Basic Setting Mode Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 1 12 2 A LISUOf MOSSAQCS ccscsccsceisscascctiesaacscerevenersen cnc esnener sates deb sevcienectesestarsteastactenee sethantes 12 1 Troubleshooting FlOW Chat c ccccccssccssctecescssetecncss esteastreettsersectsecasncvivsserstssctadienscnecsasteseds 12 8 xi Contents Chapter 13 Maintenance 13 1 Periodic Maintenance AN 13 2 Replacing the Fuse ccccccesccessssessesesessesesees
310. ph Procedure Explanation Trend and bar graph colors can be specified for each channel e These procedures are carried out in the setting mode e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys e The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press w Press the soft key Oo Setting on a measurement channel To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 Setting on a computation channel option To display the setting screen press the soft key O r Color CH Color CH Color CH Color 1 Red Red 21 Red 2 E Green 12 E Green 22 E Green 3 E Blue 13 E Blue 23 E Blue 4 E B Violet 14 E B Violet 24 E B Violet 5 E Brown 15 E Brown 25 E Brown 6 Orange 16 Orange 26 Orange 7 Y Green 17 Y Green 27 Y Green 8 LightBlue 18 LightBlue 28 LightBlue 9 Violet 19 Violet 29 Violet 18 E Gray 28 E Gray 38 a Gray 4 a 1 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Channel display color Move the cursor to the desired channel and set the channel display color select from 16 colors Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER k
311. play data storage area in the internal memory becomes full In such case Overwrite is displayed in the status display section When the number of files that remains to be saved to the external medium exceeds 16 6 The usage condition of the event data storage area in the internal memory This is displayed when event data acquisition is enabled When the trigger mode is set to Free Bar graph Displays the used space of the event data storage area Time period The remaining time for acquiring the event data When the remaining time is less than one hour the time is displayed in units of minutes For the detail of the displayed unit see Time period in item 5 above e n 16 The maximum number of event data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 16 represents this value n represents the number of files in the internal memory One file contains data that are acquired between start and stop operations Note The event data are overwritten for the following cases Be aware of these cases because data that are overwritten are lost When the event data storage area in the internal memory becomes full In such case Overwrite is displayed in the status display section When the number of files that remains to be saved to the external medium exceeds 16 4 3 4 2 Using the Status Display Section When the trigger mode is set to Trigger or Rotate e Bar graph Displays the used spac
312. play the overview see section 4 4 Measured computed value The area corresponding to a channel on which Cursor an alarm is occurring is displayed in red sm PO 2l a Tag Channel no TAG Ol I TAG 11 Alarm mark TAG 2 T Bo IEA 8 749211 a P6 eee 1 203628 TAG 08 TPG i TAG 5 Updating of the Numerical Display Measured computed values are updated every second However when the scan interval on the RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 is 2 s the display update rate is also 2 s 1 3 Display Function Alarm Summary A list of the most recent alarms can be displayed By scrolling the screen using arrow keys up to 120 incidents can be displayed By selecting an alarm from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the alarm can be recalled For a description on the historical trend display see Historical Trend in this section For the operating procedure see section 4 5 Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel no Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Date amp Time Date amp Time alarm activated alarm released 020 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 39 08 Jan 81 2000 62 39 20 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2088 82 38 21 Jan 81 2000 62 38 46 TAG 83 21
313. plied with the RD MV200 Make sure that all items are present and undamaged 4 One of these power cord types is supplied according to the instrument s suffix code A s N axe S R 6 One of these power cord types is supplied according to the suffix code A sS D F R S UL CSA Standard VDE Standard SAA Standard 7 8 9 10 11 Number Part Name Part Number Model Q ty Notes 1 Terminal screw 5 M4 2 Application RD DXA100 02 1 Included only when the suffix code for software language is 2 For Windows 95 98 NT Provided on two 3 5 floppy disks 3 External storage A1053MP 1 Zip disk included only when the suffix medium code for external storage medium is 2 A1134UN 1 ATA flash memory card included only when the suffix code for external storage medium is 3 4 Power cord A1006WD 1 Provided only when the suffix code for power connection is D A1009WD 1 Provided only when the suffix code for power connection is F A1024WD 1 Provided only when the suffix code for power connection is R A1023WD 1 Provided only when the suffix code for power connection is S 5 AC adapter B9230ZW 1 Provided only when the suffix code for power supply is 2 6 Power cord for 1 Provided only when the suffix code for AC adapter power supply is 2 7 DC power supply A1105JC 1 Provided only when the suffix code for terminal connector power supply is 2 8 Fuse
314. ply model Contact output terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Measuring input terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Between measuring input terminals 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute except for b terminal of RTD input of RD MV210 RD MV220 and RD MV230 Between remote control terminal to ground terminal 500 VDC 1 minute Certified by CSA22 2 No 1010 1 and UL3111 1 CSA NRTL C Complies with EN61010 1 option Installation category Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 22 1 Installation category Overvoltage category describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage Il applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Complies with EN61326 1 option 14 18 14 8 Dimensional Drawings Unit mm approx inch C jle J oog ooo Note The dimensional tolerance is 3 unless otherwise specified However the tolerance for OGG O00
315. port is stopped For computation you can select whether or not to stop the operation when the STOP key is pressed START key Used to start the data acquisition to the internal memory and display the waveform on the trend display Also starts computation and the report function when the computation function M1 is equipped FUNC key Used to execute various functions in the operation mode Also used to enter the basic setting mode from the setting mode ESC key Used to cancel an operation Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode This function is the same as the MENU key 3 1 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions 13 14 15 16 17 MENU key Used to enter the setting mode Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode This function is the same as the ESC key MEDIA key Detects the external storage medium and saves internal memory data to the external storage medium Arrow keys Used to select the screen in the operation mode and to select the parameter DISP ENTER key Displays and confirms the settings for switching screens in the operation mode Soft keys When the FUNC key is pressed the functions are assigned to the soft keys and displayed at the bottom of the screen During the setting basic setting modes the parameters are assigned to the soft keys and displayed at the bottom of the screen with an ATA flash
316. position Specify the scale display position for trends Partial 7 11 Turn On Off partial expanded display Position and boundary for the partial expanded display 4 4 View 7 13 Trend display direction Bar graph display direction Background color white or black Trend line width Trip line width Grid for the trend display Group display switching interval Scroll time LCD 7 14 LCD brightness Turn On Off the LCD backlight saver Transition time for the LCD backlight saver and conditions that restore the backlight 4 5 Math Color 7 8 Computation channel display color 4 6 Zone 7 9 Zone upper and lower limits for the computation channels Graph 7 10 Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar graph displays for the computation channels Bar graph base positions for the computation channels Specify the scale display position for trends for the computation channels Partial 7 11 Turn On Off partial expanded display for the computation channels Position and boundary for the partial expanded display for the computation channels 5 Save Load Clear data 5 1 Save settings Save setup data to the external storage medium 9 1 5 2 Load settings Load setup data from the external storage medium 9 1 5 3 Save data Store measured data using key operation 9 2 5 4 Load display data Load Display the display data on the external storage medium 9 3 5 5 Load event data Load Display the event data on the external
317. procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate position Press MENU Press 5 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press 9 Clear data soft key to display a confirmation window Selecting Yes and pressing the DISP ENTER key clears the data from the internal memory 9 14 9 8 Initializing Setup Data Procedure Initializes the setup data in the internal memory Also Clears display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data option report data option and logs from the internal memory this is the same function as clearing data in the setting mode explained in section 9 7 The RD MV200 returns to the operation mode For the initial settings of the setup data see Appendix 1 These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press 4 soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press 5 soft key to display the Initialize screen Initialize Kind j Initialize contents Clearl Setup settings Settings Measure ath data Clear2 Settings Neasure amp tath data Clear3 Measure amp tath data 1 Select the type of initialization to set in the Type box To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu press the ESC key Clear 1 Clears the settings in the basi
318. put exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is 2 V and the measurable range is from 2 000 to 2 000 V If the input signal exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs If the input signal falls below 2 200 V over range occurs Over range occurs when the input type is TC thermocouple or RTD resistance temperature detector and the input exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example consider the case when the measurement range is R and the measurable range is from 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the input signal exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs If the input signal falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O App 10 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Measurement computation errors are discarded when MAX and MIN are determined Measurement computation errors over range and computation overflow are discarded when determining AVE and SUM The report output values of AVE MAX MIN and SUM vary depending on the data condition of the measurement and computation channels as shown in the table below Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average
319. r computation is in progress Setting Mode The setting mode is used to change the functions for each channel and the display specifications All items except the ones listed below can be changed while data acquisition or computation is in operation Items that cannot be changed are grayed and the cursor cannot be moved on them e Items that cannot be changed while data acquisition is in progress e Input range e The trend s display update rate Auto save interval e Computing equation e Constants for computation e Items that cannot be changed while computation is in progress e Range setting e Computing equation Constants for computation e TLOG timer number and computing unit 3 10 3 5 Configuring the Functions Configuration Details The configuration details of the setting mode and the basic setting mode are shown below Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections Settings related to the input Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Scan interval 5 9 Scan interval Input specifications 5 1 to 5 7 Input type Measurement range Upper and lower limit of span Reference channel for differential computation Upper and lower limits of scale Unit Burnout 5 9 e Burn out Off Up Down Reference junction compensation 5 9 e Switch between Internal and External e Compensation voltage when set to External Noise elimination the A D 5 9 Filter time constan
320. r which the computation is turned OFF Example The following example is for channels 1 2 3 4 and 31 MANUAL SAMPLE DATA Model Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX File Header AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA CH TAG 1 CH01 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 CH31 UNIT VV mV 2000 01 01 01 08 43 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 08 48 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 09 15 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 CH TAG 1 CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 CH31 i UNIT VV FV nV NV 2000 01 01 01 15 30 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 2000 01 01 01 18 12 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 12 00 Data size e Size of the header section The following equation can be used to derive the size of the header section Title carriage return line feed serial number carriage return line feed file header carriage return line feed channel tag 8 19 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed unit 6 9 x number of channels that are output carriage return line feed e The size of the title is fixed to 20 bytes The size of the serial number is fixed to 38 bytes The size of the file header is fixed to 49 bytes The size of the carriage return line feed is fixed to 2 bytes Calculation example Manual sampled data for 30 channels 20 2 38 2 49 2 8 19 x 30 2 6 9 x 30
321. ration After the time to create the Report data are created immediately after power is restored The report measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used For the next scheduled report data after the power recovery are used Before the time to create After power is restored report data are created at the time of the the report next normally scheduled report All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the measured computed data are handled when there is an abnormality in the data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data Average value Maximum Minimum value Sum value Positive over not used used not used Negative over not used used not used Error not used not used not used over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels Displaying the report Report data display The reports can be displayed from the Information Memory Summary menu in the operation mode See section 4 5 Status display If the data of a measurement or a computation channel enter any of the conditions listed below within the relevant time period one hour for hourly reports and one day for daily reports for example status E or O is output to the report In addition if a power failure occurred or the time was changed status P and C are output to the report respectively For the displayed position see the report
322. ration can be carried out with the START STOP key the FUNC key or the USER key when Math is assigned The computation can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands e Reset computation data This operation can be carried out with the FUNC key or the USER key when Math rst is assigned The computation data can also be reset via remote control or communication commands e Release the computation data dropout display This operation is carried out with the FUNC key The computation data dropout display can also be released via communication commands For the remote control function see section 10 9 For the communication function see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 Start stop computation Procedure Operation using the START STOP key e Starting the computation also starts the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the START key to start the computation At this point the data acquisition to the internal memory is also started When the computation is started a computation icon is displayed in the status display section For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 Stopping the computation also stops the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window is displayed For models with the batch function BT1 option the batch information is also displayed 2 Use the arrow keys to select
323. re computed data Channels assignable to computed data RD MV204 RD MV208 Up to 8 channels RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Up to 30 channels Operation General arithmetic operations Four arithmetic operations square root absolute common logarithm exponential power relational operations lt lt gt 2 logical operations AND OR NOT XOR Statistical operations Average maximum minimum summation and maximum minimum Special operations Rolling average moving average on computed results Constant Available Up to 30 constants Digital input data via communication Digital data via communication can be used in calculation expression Up to 30 data Remote input status Remote input status 0 1 can be used in calculation expression Up to 8 inputs Report functions Report type Hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly Operation Average maximum minimum and summation Data format ASCII 14 12 14 6 SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Remote Control R1 This option allows the following functions to be controlled remotely by a contact or an open collector input up to eight inputs Alarm acknowledgment trigger 250 ms or longer e Start stop of data acquisition rising and falling edge Trigger for event data acquisition trigger 250 ms or longer Time adjustment adjusting the internal clock to the nearest hour upon remote signal trigger 250 ms or longer Time of signal
324. re root and the measurement span or scaling value is changed includes decimal position change e Ifthe range setting is set to Skip alarm setting is not possible The alarm setting boxes are grayed in this case These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow Once new settings are confirmed they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key owt l First CH Last CH H jar jar r Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper Volt E 2 000 2 000 r Alarm Rel Type Value On Ott Number 1 im fH 6 000 On Jia 2 off 3 Off 4 Off a 2 3 4 5 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 First channel and last channel Select the desired channels For the channels set here Range is also simultaneously set 6 5 suuely Pumas pue buibpe mouyoy H 6 2 Alarm Setting 2 On Off When the alarm is turned on Type Value and Relay On Off are displayed 3 Type Set the alarm type For the alarm types see Explanation Nota ___________ss z_ ______ If you select delay alarm T or t for the al
325. re to be displayed on the operation screen trend display digital display etc The initial setting is channel number display Tag names are set in the setting mode e These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter e The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press ew Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key 2 AUX Tag Channel 1 Henory alarm 1h Language English Partial Use The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Tag Channel Select Tag or Channel Tag Display tags Channel Display channel numbers Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note If a channel is set to display the tag but the tag name is not entered the channel will display the channel number 7 2 7 3 Setting the Display Update Rate Trend Procedure Explanation The time p
326. red Instruments For calibrating the RD MV200 calibration instruments with the following resolution are necessary Recommended Instruments DC voltage standard Model 2552 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 20 mV to 20 V 0 005 Decade resistance box M amp C Model 2793 01 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of output in the range 0 1 to 500 Q 0 001 Resolution 0 001 Q To purchase these instruments contact the supplier of the RD MV200 Calibration procedure 1 Connect the RD MV200 and the calibration instruments as shown in the following figure and allow the instruments to warm up adequately The warm up time for the RD MV200 is at least 30 minutes 2 Check that the ambient temperature and humidity are within the normal operating conditions See chapter 14 3 Apply input signals corresponding to 0 50 and 100 of the specified input range and calculate the errors from the readings If the error is not within the accuracy specifications contact Omega Note For TC input the temperature of the input terminals must be measured and a voltage corresponding to the temperature at the reference junction must be added DC Voltage Measurement Example for the RD MV210 soueUD UIe 2 i m ia Oo Oo p sli OOOO000 Ha o0 0000 ee Input terminals DC voltage standard 13 3 13 3 Calibration Temperatur
327. reen 1 Select display data or event data using the left and right arrow keys The selected file type is indicated by a green circle to the left of DISPLAY DATA or EVENT DATA Information about the selected file is displayed Opening the display event data file from Memory Summary recalling the historical trend 1 Select the file using the up and down arrow keys H SAMPLE DATA 83 58 Jan 1 2088 88 12 48 RELAY 1 D00080 2 000008 TLOG DATA 000 400 3 0H8088 REPORT DATA 84 48 Jan 81 2088 68 14 58 SAMPLE DATA DISPLAY DATA EVENT DATA Start Time End Time Data Factor Jan 01 2088 00 25 04 Jan 81 2688 68 27 54 86 Sampling Jan 1 2688 00 15 04 Jan 01 2088 00 25 82 388 Auto Save Jan 1 26808 00 14 16 Jan 81 2000 60 14 48 17 Stop Selected file Jan 01 2008 00 11 24 Jan 1 2088 00 12 54 46 Stop Jan 01 2888 00 10 48 Jan 1 2608 68 11 84 9 Stop Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key izo INFOR E HATION JUMP TO HISTORY i Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key su 19 5 uopesado HulyIMS gt 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Report Data M1 option Date and
328. ress for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Press u soft key to display the Save Load Initialize menu screen Press 2 soft key to display the Load settings screen rLoad settings File name Time TEST PNL 2000 01 01 82 85 1 A list of setup files in the storage medium appears Select the file to be loaded The extension of setup files is PNL To cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Initialize menu press the ESC key 2 Press the DISP ENTER key to load the file After loading the screen returns to the operation mode The loaded setup data take effect Note If the loaded data does not take effect refer to the error log For the procedure related to displaying the error log see section 10 7 9 4 9 2 Saving data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using key operation The following data in the internal storage memory are saved to the external storage medium using key operation Display data Event data Manual sampled data TLOG data option Report data option Procedure These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Press ew Press 5 soft key to display the Save Load Clear data menu screen Press 3 Save data soft key to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium Note The data in the internal memory cannot be saved to the external stor
329. ress the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key The integration time of the A D converter The RD MV200 uses an A D converter to convert the input signal to a digital signal The A D converter operates at an integral time of 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz or 100 ms By setting the integration time to match the frequency of the power supply being used power supply frequency noise can be minimized Burnout of Thermocouple Input When the alarm is set to detect positive or negative over range the occurrence of burnout of thermocouple can be displayed as an alarm Turn the burnout function OFF when connecting the input wires in parallel with other devices Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input When using the reference junction compensation of the RD MV200 see Precautions to be taken while wiring in section 2 3 Input Signal Wiring When using the external reference junction compensation set an appropriate reference junction compensation voltage As in the example in the following figure if the reference junction temperature for the external reference junction compensation is To C set the thermoelect
330. rm on Alarm off Alarm ACK Relay output on Relay output off Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 are set to non hold Specifying hold produces no effect Relays 111 112 113 are used for models without 101 to 106 Hold Non hold of the alarm indicator When the alarm changes from the activated state to the released state you can select to release the alarm indicator in sync with the alarm release non hold or e release the alarm indicator with an alarm acknowledge operation hold The initial setting is Nonhold For details regarding the alarm indicator see section 6 1 6 13 suuely Pumas pue Huibpe mouyoy H Chapter 7 Setting and Operating the Display 7 1 Setting Tag Names Procedure Tag names can be displayed in place of channel numbers on the operation screen trend display digital display etc Tag names are saved to the file along with the data The basic setting mode is used to select whether tags or channel numbers are displayed see section 7 2 These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Setti
331. rnal Storage Medium Managing files Displaying free space on the external storage medium Saving the ScreemlM AGS wvsivcs teevsses sisecveccecevsencnvervesersevvcenteevevcavasevsteadtetievac sita ians Clearing Data from the Internal Memory MrMItiAli ZING SOLU Ate e a ences r A cxcteesechinsixecesncadedaccs Oa Ar a SEERE Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 14 10 15 USER KOV irn iiae i syeceetitpacteeacta Ea aE Eaa aa ASE a RE AEN 10 1 Assigning anAction to the USER Key 2 isiesciscsieicieccasiecicacgesctenases igzneaneauceupsbeaestincaleberets 10 2 SIME ROWLOCK oss este cet ce ces ode a E A T E E E 10 3 Setting the Key Lock Function Basic Setting Mode ccccesceeeeeeeeeeeereteneeeeeeeeneeee 10 4 Using the Key Login Logout Function eeccesseeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeseaeeseaeeeeeesaeeeaes 10 6 Setting the Key Login Logout Functions Basic Setting Mode ccceeceeeeeeteeeeeees 10 8 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen eceeeceeesceeseceeeeeeeneeeseeeeaeeseaeeeseeeeaeeseaees 10 10 Setting the Memory End Relay Output Time F1 Option Basic Setting Mode 10 12 Setting the Remote Control Functions R1 Option Basic Setting Mode 0 10 13 Setting the Displayed Language Basic Setting Mode eeceeseeeeeeeeereeereeeneeeneees 10 16 Using the Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Function uu eee 10 22 Setting the Tem
332. rocess Measurement and Control OMEGA Of Course Shop online at www omega com TEMPERATURE 4 Thermocouple RTD amp Thermistor Probes Connectors Panels amp Assemblies 4 Wire Thermocouple RTD amp Thermistor A Calibrators amp Ice Point References 4 Recorders Controllers amp Process Monitors WY Infrared Pyrometers PRESSURE STRAIN AND FORCE 4 Transducers amp Strain Gages 4 Load Cells amp Pressure Gages 4 Displacement Transducers 4 Instrumentation amp Accessories FLOW LEVEL 4 Rotameters Gas Mass Flowmeters amp Flow Computers WY Air Velocity Indicators 4 Turbine Paddlewheel Systems A Totalizers amp Batch Controllers pH CONDUCTIVITY uF pH Electrodes Testers amp Accessories 4 Benchtop Laboratory Meters 4 Controllers Calibrators Simulators amp Pumps WY Industrial pH amp Conductivity Equipment DATA ACQUISITION A Data Acquisition amp Engineering Software 4 Communications Based Acquisition Systems 4 Plug in Cards for Apple IBM amp Compatibles 4 Datalogging Systems A Recorders Printers amp Plotters HEATERS 4 Heating Cable A Cartridge amp Strip Heaters 4 Immersion amp Band Heaters 4 Flexible Heaters 4 Laboratory Heaters ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND CONTROL 4 Metering amp Control Instrumentation 4 Refractometers 4 Pumps amp Tubing A Air Soil amp Water Monitors 4 Industrial Water amp Wastewater Treatment lA pH Conductivity
333. romotive force of the 0 C reference for To C as the reference junction compensation voltage An example of External reference junction compensation cf T RD MV200 External reference junction compensation Maintain the junction between the thermocouple and the copper wire at To C Copper wire Thermocouple 5 16 Chapter 6 Acknowledging and Setting Alarms 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Procedure Explanation This section describes the procedures to release the alarm indication and the output relay when the behavior of the indicator or the output relay is set to hold The indicator or output relay condition varies depending on the timing at which the alarm release operation is carried out Operation using the FUNC key This operation is carried out in the operation mode 1 Press the FUNC key to display the soft key menu 2 To release the alarm indication and the output relay press the Alarm ACK soft key Operation using the USER key This is an operation carried out when Alarm ACK is assigned to the USER key 1 To release the alarm indication and the output relay press the USER key The indications and output relays generated by all alarms are released The release operation is void if the behavior of the indicator or the output relay is set to non hold The release operation can be executed via remote control option or via communications
334. s accessories sold separately Vi accessories standard ai adjusting the internal clock remote control 10 14 ANN enanar tues uarwanes oud wee 1 22 alarm computation 11 3 Alarm ACK 6 1 alarm NySteresis o cinraiiiiisnoaisirusinnsanda eiiiai anena iaiia 1 24 alarm icon alarm mark alarm output Flay eee cece eee ceeeee cee eeeceeeeeeneseeeeeeeeee 1 24 alarm point MAMK asin areenaa a a n aaia 6 3 alarm summary ALANMUANQ Ol sanna E R all channel display c eceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneteees AND OR onnies application name arithmetical operations ASCII file ics ceccsestececiess ATA flash memory card auto logout AULO SAVE tei iiierrevenetie nies wastes ecnieeiaatieenss AUTO SAVE Miter alkaisi automatic increment of the lot number automatic switching of displayed group eeee background color backlight saver bar graph screen base position basic setting mode re DIO CK eset 8 4 8 24 BIMQMINGSS secccaz cectecs sr ecsi acs isorsaa vas stant TE 1 19 aIle PARE EAE A E 1 3 C Cali AQlOM sianar aasa aa aAa A E OE 13 3 capacity internal memory s sssnssssnensnsnennensisnnnnnnsnnnnnnenene 8 6 cautions messages ih CEI US reann earet ieee AEA AEEA EENE channel assignment Jro p isissriirisizisiirisisi sisindiran 7 8 channel display area 6 3 channel display color 7 12 channel number display
335. s data used in computation date and THINS sessies seisis reini EEE nN date and time entering comment eeeseesreresreereerseeees 10 18 daylight savings time BLOCUL E i E E E E T E are DG voltage AEC DDR DDS delay lower limit Alarmi wisccceccstecececceedaceecssetadecazesiececstensiene 1 23 delay upper limit alarm as deleting a directory 9 10 9 12 deleting TICS csccessscnecsnatsceaccensedecsceabeezasseaheatestaasctsaetass 9 9 9 12 Index 1 difference lower limit alarm difference upper limit alarm digtakinpUt missae rere errr er rerereerary CiGitall SNES Niwt ciesercieveres heen eee tte dimensional drawings CIFECIOLY Name arraien eei ai iia directory name manual save c eect eeeeeeeeeeeeeees directory name saving data using key operation display conditions of the LCD display dataci testes e ees elias display direction bar graph display direction trend display reference position display update rate displayed color bar graph displayed color message EA displayed color trend isisisi aniis displayed color trip line 00 0 eee eee eee eneenereenee displayed data of the waveform displayed data type historical trend 0 00 4 15 4 16 displayed informati M asinis siina 10 20 displayed language dividing report fileS oo eee eee ee eee re eneeee renee eeetnenes CJSCHOUTION 2 1 cceset shed r r aa eae EMC
336. s press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Note When computation is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned OFF 11 11 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 4 Setting Computation Channels Explanation The computing elements are assigned to the character number input keys by the number of times the key is pressed as follows Character number input key asc 2oer 3am 4u 5mo Gran Zsu 8wx 9x a Owe Co Computing Elements Key Pressed Once Twice 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 1 K C D 2 3 SQR ABS LOG EXP 4 EQ NE GT AT GE LE 5 AND NOT XOR OR 6 TLOG AVE TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG SUM TLOG P P 11 12 11 5 Setting the Alarm Procedure You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The alarm types are upper limit alarm H lower limit alarm L delay upper limit alarm T and delay lower limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 Note ____ When Math On Off is turn ON an entry box used to enter the equation is displayed and the alarm setting boxes are activated white color Set the alarm after setting the equation When computation
337. s determined and the result is displayed as computed data for that channel The sampling interval and the number of samples can be specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 64 The initial setting is OFF do not perform moving average For the setting procedure see section 11 10 You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The alarm types are upper limit alarm H lower limit alarm L delay upper limit alarm T and delay lower limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 For the procedures to set the alarms see section 11 5 For the alarm indication see section 4 2 and 6 1 Acquiring the computed data Display data and event data The computed data from the computation channels can be acquired as the display data and event data in the same manner as for the measurement channels See chapter 8 Manual sampled data The instantaneous values of all computation channels excluding the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory with the manual sampling operation For the operating procedure see sections 8 12 TLOG data The TLOG computation data are acquired every interval For the setting procedure see sections 11 7 11 8 and 11 9 Setting computation channels The computation channel specifications are set in the setting mode For detail see sections 11 4 through 11 6 The timer used in the TLOG computation is set in the ba
338. s the current display data on the upper right half of the screen and the historical trend on the lower left half of the screen Enclosed in parentheses are for the vertical trend display 1 Pressing the down left arrow key displays the current trend and the historical trend To return to the previous screen press the up arrow key Historical trend Current trend Data from the current trend 4 23 su 19 5 uopesado BulyoyMs gt 4 6 Using the Historical Trend Background color of the historical trend The background color of the historical trend is either black or white opposite of the background color displayed for the current trend Displaying the memory information 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the screen menu TREND HISTORY is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select INFORMATION ON using the up and down arrow keys INFORMATION ON 4 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the window with the memory information For models with the batch function BT1 batch number and lot number information of the display event data displayed as a historical trend is also displayed 5 To clear the window press the DISP ENTER key or one of the arrow keys 4 24 4 7 Using the 4 Screen Display The initial setting is as follows Display Name Displays Shown MIX Trend group 1 digital
339. s15 channels to acquire the data s s isissri isprid channels to display the trend character number input key CAV ACLONS arinrin aia e i clear computed results remote control 0 0 10 14 clearing data me clearing the character String s s sisisi 3 23 combinations of user IDs and passwords cee 1 27 COMMENT yarirn i i a aaa 1 27 COMMON lOgarithM iiinn 11 1 communication input data 00 0 0 eee eee ee ence erent 11 2 computation channels 11 1 computation dropout display 11 9 computation function a125 COMPULATONACOM Ariea ara ERETTE ESTEE 4 4 computation operators RONNNNNAOGDKREAGKREAGDGGAGDGARAA 11 4 computing element 11 12 conditions of the remote control terminals e 11 2 CONSTANTS inaa Aa 11 1 contact specifications alarm contact specifications FAIL memory end 2 11 copying a character StringS isieriiiircsriris ssis 3 23 cursor historical trend cceseeeee ee eeeeeereteeeeeeneneees 1 17 CUISOF OVEIVICW Liisi iraia ianiai apia ariii 1 10 D daily TE POMt venenita seansa iaaeaie data acquisition display data ae data acquisition event data eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees data acquisition manual sampled data c eee 8 9 data acquisition report data data acquisition TLOG data data display section data formats of ASCII files d ta length as ccccswseedccsaeetccevees scacecsss evesecats scene
340. screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key Oon AUX Tag Channel Channel Henory alarm Language English Partial Use The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Memory alarm This is the minimum storage time of the internal memory at which the relay should be activated Select a value from 1 h 2h 5h 10 h 20 h 50 h and 100 h Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 12 10 9 Setting the Remote Control Functions R1 Option Basic Setting Mode Various actions can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals The assigned action can then be executed by applying a remote input signal to the corresponding terminal Procedure These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press mw Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting s
341. se Connect the shield to the functional ground terminal of the RD MV200 as necessary Input Specifications Item Specification Input signal Voltage free dry contact open collector TTL or transistor Input conditions ON voltage Less than or equal to 0 5 V 30 mA DC Leakage current in the OFF state No more than 0 25 mA Signal duration 250 ms minimum Input type Photocoupler isolation one side common Internal isolated power source 5 V 5 Dielectric strength 500 VDC for one minute between input terminals and the ground terminal For details related to the control and input types see section 10 9 2 12 2 7 VGA Output Wiring D5 Option AN CAUTION Before connecting the monitor to the RD MV200 be sure to turn OFF the power to both monitor and RD MV200 e Never short circuit the VIDEO OUT terminal or apply an external voltage otherwise damage to the RD MV200 may result VIDEO OUT terminal The RD MV200 s screen can be displayed on a monitor via this terminal Only a VGA monitor or a multi synchronous monitor which is capable of displaying VGA can be used Specifications Pin No Signal Name Specification 1 1 Red 0 7 Vp p 2 Green 0 7 Vp p 3 Blue 0 7 Vp p 4 5 1 5 6 7 OOO00 8 10 O00 6 9 0O000 10 GND 11 12 15 11 13 Horizontal synchronous Approx 31 5 kHz signal TTL negative D Sub 15 pin receptacle 14 Vert
342. sic setting mode For detail see section 11 9 11 3 uondo uonsuny Woday uonejndwog F 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations This section describes the meaning of the computation equation and how to write them Four arithmetical computations The types of data that can be used in equations are measurement channels computation channels constants KO1 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C30 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 EXAMPLE Addition 01 02 Computes the value of channel 1 plus the value of channel 2 Subtraction 01 02 Computes the value of channel 1 minus the value of channel 2 Multiplication x 01xK03 Computes the value of channel 1 multiplied by constant number 3 Division 01 K02 Computes the value of channel 1 divided by constant number 2 Note When you set an expression as e g 31 31 01 the summation of channel number 1 will be displayed in channel 31 Power SQR ABS LOG EXP Computations The types of data that can be used in equations are measurement channels computation channels constants KO1 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C30 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can nest a computing element inside the parentheses of another computing element EXAMPLE Power xx 01x02 Raises measured value of channel 1 to the power of measured value of channel 2 Square root SQR SQR 01
343. splay data and event data The sampling length is calculated by defining the capacity for display data as 900 000 bytes and the capacity for event data as 300 000 bytes The method of calculation is the same as shown above Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 for display data and 30 000 for event data 14 6 14 3 Data Storage Specifications Example of sampling length In case measurement ch 4 ch mathematical ch 0 ch Display data file only Display rate min div approx 240 min Sampling interval s Sampling length Event data file only Sampling interval Sampling length Display data file Event data file Display data file Display rate min div 34 days 125 ms 500 ms 1s 42h 16h 33h 480s 416 days approx 120s 166 days approx 240 min Sampling interval s Sampling length Event data file Sampling interval Sampling length In case measurement Display data file only Display rate min div 26 days 125 ms 500 ms 1s th 4 2h 83h ch 6 ch mathematical 480s approx 120s 41 days approx 240 min Sampling interval s Sampling length Event data file only Sampling interval Sampling length Display data file Event data file Display data file Display rate min div 23 days 1s 5s 10s 27h 5 days 11 days 480s approx 120s 138 days approx 240 min
344. splay position 1 Example 2 When the channels were assigned to a group in the following order 01 02 03 05 and the scale display position for channels 1 2 3 and 5 are set to positions 1 3 6 and 10 respectively The scales for the channels are actually displayed at positions 1 2 3 and 4 respectively e Ifthe scale display position is set to Off the scale is not displayed Scale marks The scale can be divided into 4 to 12 sections using the main scale marks The area between the main scale marks is divided further into 10 sections using small and medium marks However small marks are not displayed for the following cases e When the measurement computation range resolution is smaller than the total number of sections created by small marks e When zone display is used e When partial expanded display is used 7 18 7 10 Setting the Scale Division Bar Graph Base Position Bar Graph and Scale Position Trend Bar base position Scale values The scale values are displayed at all main scale marks when the scale is divided into 4 to 7 sections using the main scale marks When the scale is divided into 8 to 12 sections the scale values are displayed at every other main scale mark In addition the upper or lower limit of the scale is displayed at the end of the scale Rule 1 Up to 4 digits excluding the minus sign can be displayed for the scale values Rule 2 If the integer section of either value at the end of
345. storage medium 9 4 5 6 File list List the files on the external storage medium 9 5 5 7 Delete Delete files on the external storage medium 9 5 5 8 Format Format the external storage medium 9 5 5 9 Clear data Clear the measure computed data in the internal memory 9 7 6 Time set 3 7 Enter the current time 7 Math range 11 4 Computing equations display span and unit for computation channels Math alarm 11 5 Alarm type for the computation channel Alarm value for the computation channel Output relay On Off for the computation channel Output relay number for the computation channel Constant 11 6 Constants KO1 to K30 8 Tag 7 1 Tag names of the computation channels g TLOG 11 8 Rolling average 11 10 Alarm delay time 6 3 Timer number used in TLOG sum unit Turn On Off the rolling average Sampling interval and the number of samples for the rolling average 3 16 3 5 Configuring the Functions The menu screen and items of the basic setting mode The menu screen and items of the basic setting mode are as follows Enclosed in parentheses are reference sections Basic setting mode Alarm A D Temperature 2 Henory Henory and trend AUX Keylock Key login Save Load Initialize To Save Load Initialize menu below See the RD MV100 RD MV200 Option Communi cation End 2 iid Save Load Initialize menu Save Load Initialize Commun
346. sured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 NE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is not equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 LE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value in channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 Logical Computation The computation is performed using e1 and e2 which are identified as either zero or non zero The types of data that can be used in equations are measurement channels computation channels constants KO1 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C30 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs logical computation on a computing element AND Logical product Syntax e1 ANDe2 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog Condition If both e1 and e2 are non 0 the operation results in 1 otherwise in 9 Status e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e240 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 1 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations OR Logical sum Syntax e10Re2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are 0 the operation results in 0 other
347. t measured values Red Released Alarm mark Blinks in green Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm point mark Green Measured value Blue Alarm indication in the overview display Tag Channel no Alarm type When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work Channel data display area Measured value Indicator Hold Non Hold Alarm Alarm Indication Non hold Activated Channel display area Red Channel tag alarm type and measured values All white Released Channel display area Green Channel tag and measured value Black Alarm type Not displayed Hold Activated Channel display area Red Channel tag Blinks in white Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type and measured value White Released Channel display area Green Channel tag Blinks in black Stops blinking with alarm ACK Alarm type Not displayed Measured value Black When the alarm indication is set to non hold alarm ACK does not work 6 3 suuely Humas pue Huibpea mouyoy H 6 1 Releasing the Alarm Indication and Output Relay Option Alarm Summary Display 828 128 Channel Type Alarm IN Time Alarm OUT Time TAG B3 21 Jan 81 2888 62 39 31 TAG 83 21 Jan 61 2008 62 39 88 Jan 1 2088 02 39 20 TAG 83 21 Jan 81 2808 62 38 21 Jan 1 2888 82 38 46 TAG 83 21 Jan 1 2088 62 37 58 Jan 1 2888 82 38 18 m TAG 83 21 Jan 1 20
348. t 0 C you can input the thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference from the DC voltage standard and make the calibration 13 4 13 4 Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn Parts To maintain the reliability of the RD MV200 and to use it in good working order for a long time we recommend periodic replacement of worn parts as preventive maintenance The recommended replacement periods for worn parts are shown in the following table The replacement periods apply when the RD MV200 is operated under standard operating conditions Please consider the actual operating conditions when determining the actual replacement periods for your RD MV200 The replacement of the worn parts other than the fuse must be conducted by qualified Omega personnel Contact Omega to have the LCD replaced Item Replacement Period Part Name Part Number Specifications Quantity Used Fuse 2 years FUSE A1423EF 250 V 1 25 A time 1 lag for AC power supply model 2 years FUSE A1354EF 250 V 6 3 A time lag 1 for 12 VDC power supply model LCD 5 years Back light module 1 Battery 10 years Lithium battery 1 Floppy 5 years 1 disk drive Zip 5 years 1 drive Note The recommended replacement period for the back light module is the period when the brightness falls to half The speed of degradation of the brightness varies depending on the operating conditions and the judgement is subjective These f
349. t Off RD MV204 RD MV208 5 8 Integration time of converter Number of samples for the moving average Off RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 5 8 Settings related to the alarm Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Alarm Alarm type 6 2 e Display hold non hold 6 4 Alarm value 6 2 The time interval for the rate of Output relay On Off 6 2 change alarm for measurement Output relay number 6 2 channels only 6 4 Alarm delay time 6 3 e Hysteresis for measurement channels only 6 4 Alarm output relay operation option 6 4 e Reflash alarm AND operation e Relay energize de energize Relay hold non hold suoneiado UoWWOD epoyy UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 5 Configuring the Functions Settings related to the display Item Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode Display group Group name 7 6 Channel assignment 7 6 Group display switching interval 7 13 Tag Channel display Tag name 7 1 e Switch between tag display and channel display 7 2 Trend Display update rate 7 3 Message 7 5 Trip line position display color 7 7 Trip line width 7 13 Channel display color 7 8 applies also to bar graphs Display direction vertical horizontal 7 13 Trend line width 7 13 Grid 7 13 Number of scale divisions 7 10 applies also to bar graphs Scale position 7 10 Zone upper and lower limits 7 9 Partial expanded display 7
350. t signals that exceed the following values This can damage the RD MV200 e Maximum input voltage Voltage range of 2 VDC or less or thermocouples 10 VDC Voltage range between 6 and 20 VDC 30 VDC e Maximum common mode noise voltage 250 VAC rms 50 60 Hz e This RD MV200 is an INSTALLATION CATEGORY II product ES E a I Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the RD MV200 and remove the input terminal cover 2 Connect the input signal wires to the input terminals 3 Replace the input terminal cover and fasten it with screws RD MV204 RD MV208 Input Terminal Position CH1 to CH4 CH5 to CH8 RD MV208 2 4 2 3 Input Signal Wiring e Terminal Arrangement Clamped Input Terminals Screw Terminals CH4 CH2 CH3 _CH1 CH7 CH5 E E 5 D o E CH8 CH6 Wiring Diagram DC Voltage and DI Contact Input Q DC voltage input 8 Resistance Temperature Detector Input Leadwire resistance 10 Q max wire The resistance of the three wires should be approximately equal CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5 DAOC lb DOGE A ODQQEC B Thermocouple Input Extension leadwire
351. ta EVENT GELEI es A TREND gt GROUP 1 soo LLL SLL EL Nt p Sae cee tty a i Gey DISP O Simin N i Tr a STMT wo A mi 0 3 0 3 E E 0 3 0 E Sa 0 8 0 9 HL F1 11 6 E18 42 Status display section Data display section men Screen menu Sub menu Displayed by pressing the DISP ENTER key The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section The operation screen includes trend digital bar graph alarm summary message summary memory summary report option historical trend and 4 screen display The arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key are used to switch the screen Screen menu Sub menu menu is displayed The following operations are possible Displayed when the DISP ENTER key is pressed Displayed when the right arrow key is pressed while the screen e For trend digital and bar graph displays the displayed group can be automatically switched e Recalling the historical trend at the time the alarm selected in the Alarm Summary occurred or the message selected in the Message Summary is written Also displaying the historical trend selected in the Memory Summary e Switching to the trend or bar graph screen that contains the channel data pointed on the overview screen
352. ted character type Insert overwrite Procedure When the window used to enter the string appear enter the characters according to the following key operations e Left and right arrow keys Selects the input position Character number input key Enters the character The character is selected according to the character type and the number of times the key is pressed see the explanation e Space soft key Enters a space or overwrites with a space DEL soft key Deletes the character at the cursor position BS soft key Deletes the character to the left of the cursor position INS soft key Selects insert or overwrite Insert and overwrite modes switch each time the INS soft key is pressed The selected mode is displayed to the right of the soft key display section 1 a A soft key Select upper case alphabet A lower case alphabet a or numbers 1 The character type is switched in the following order each time the 1 a A soft key is pressed The selected character type is displayed to the right of the soft key display section Upper case alphabet A lower case alphabet a numbers 1 3 22 3 6 Common Key Operations Explanation The relationship between the character number input keys and the available characters is shown below Character number input key Iac 20 Saw 442 Smo Gran Zsu 8wx 9x Ox Co
353. ter number input keys displays a window used to enter a string Enter the string and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 9 Enter setup Select whether or not to allow the login user to enter the basic setting mode Enable The user can enter the basic setting mode Disable The user can not enter the basic setting mode Note The Enter Setup of all users cannot be set to Disabled If specified the user with the lowest registration number with the fifth parameter turned On is automatically set to Enabled The setting is changed when the setup data is stored and the basic setting mode is terminated Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key e If the user name already exists a confirmation message This user name is already registered is displayed At this point the user name is confimred confirmed by not yet registered If necessary change the user name to be registered Press the DISP ENTER key to register the user name To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key 10 9 suonoun 194 0 2 10 7 Displaying the Log Screen System Screen Procedure Explanation The following list is displayed on the log screen e Error messages the newest 50 e A record of key login
354. ter strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 3 CH Set Assign measurement computation channels to groups Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the channel number to be assigned Enter the channel number according to the following rules and press the DISP ENTER key Enter the channel number using two digits Separate each channel with a period Consecutive channels can be specified using a hyphen Example To set CH1 CH3 CH5 to CH8 to a particular group 01 03 05 08 is entered For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 7 8 7 6 Setting Groups Explanation For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Note The channels are displayed in the order they are specified on the trend digital bar graph displays One channel can be assigned to multiple groups Achannel cannot be assigned twice in the same group Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial settings of the groups Group Name Group 1 GROUP 1 Group 2 GROUP 2 Group 3 GROUP 3 Group 4 GROUP 4 The initial value varies depending on the number of installed ch
355. than 40 C we recommend the external storage medium be inserted into the drive when saving the data and be removed after the data have been saved manual save see section 8 4 Remove the external storage medium from the drive when turning ON OFF the RD MV200 Do not remove the external storage medium while the access lamp is lit Doing so can destroy the data on the medium If you are using the compact flash card on RD MV200s with the ATA flash memory card driver be careful of the static electricity The RD MV200 may not operate properly if you touch the compact flash card that is inserted into the recorder when there is static electricity on your body CAUTION Don t expose the floppy disk drive or Zip drive to vibration or shocks as it may damage the drives 2 1 OOZAIN GH a4 Bursn 21049 2 2 Installing the RD MV200 Installation location Install the RD MV200 in a location that meets the following conditions See also the normal operating conditions described in section 14 7 General Specifications CAUTION For safety reasons don t mount the recorder with the back panel downwards Instrument panel or rack The RD MV200 is designed for panel or rack mounting Well ventilated location To prevent overheating install the RD MV200 in a well ventilated location A space of 50 mm or more from the right left and top surface of the RD MV200 is recommended Minimum mechanical vibrations C
356. the Menu or ESC key to return to the menu screen of the setting mode Saving the settings and returning to the operation mode 1 Press the MENU or the ESC key to save the settings and return to the operation mode Entering Numbers The operation to enter numbers is used such as when setting the date time or the display span of the input range Window for entering numbers Range Alarm First CH Last CH Jer jar I BA pan Hode Range Lower Volt BE 2 000 Procedure When the window used to enter the numbers appears enter the value according to the following key operations Left and right arrow keys Selects the input position Character number input key Enters the number The following soft keys appear when appropriate Space soft key Enters a space or overwrites with a space 3 21 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SEWeN 7 3 6 Common Key Operations Explanation Character number input key You can enter numbers a decimal point and a minus sign Uac 20 3cm 4u 5mo rar Zsu 8w 2x cra O Gio minus sign decimal point Entering characters Used to set tag names set message strings set or enter passwords Window for entering charcters Tag Moving average First CH Last CH Jar Jar Tag Tas ing average Count Off Selec
357. the internal memory Displayed on the alarm summary screen suonesiioeds 14 9 14 5 Specifications of Communication Functions Connection Ethernet 10BASE T Protocols TCP IP FTP client functions Automatic file transport from the RD MV200 FTP client protocol FTP server functions File transport on request by host computer FTP server protocol Directory operation file output file delete and informing of the rest of memory space on the external storage medium Files can be transported Display data file event data file and report data file Real time monitor function Monitor the measured computed data on the RD MV200 private protocol is used 14 10 14 6 Specifications of Optional Functions Alarm Output Relays AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 An alarm signal is output from the rear panel as a relay contact signal AR1 and AR2 includes remote control functions R1 Relay contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A 250 VDC 0 1 A for resistance load Terminal configuration SPDT NO C NC Energized at alarm de energized at alarm AND OR hold non hold and reflash actions are selectable Serial Communication Interface C2 C3 This interface allows the host computer to control and make settings for the RD MV200 as well as receive data from the RD MV200 Connection EIA RS 232 C2 or RS 422 A 485 C3 Protocols private protocol Modbus protocol Synchronization method Start stop asynchronous
358. the maximum and minimum values for each sampling interval from among measured data acquired at scan intervals Files can be created in the following combinations e Event data file only for trigger mode display data file e Display data file only e Event data file only Data format Binary Data size per channel Display data Measurement data 4 bytes datum EE computation data 8 bytes datum Event data Measurement data 2 bytes datum D computation data 4 bytes datum 8 Modes for event data Event data only Selectable from Free Trigger or Rotate a Display data Event data Selectable from Trigger or Rotate Sampling length The sampling length the maximum data length can be T derived from the following equation Sampling length the maximum number of data points per channel x sampling interval Maximum number of data points per channel calculated from internal memory capacity types of data data size and number of measurement or computation channels data to be stored 14 5 14 3 Data Storage Specifications Internal memory capacity Data type Capacity of internal memory Display data only 1 2 MB Display data and event data Display data 0 9 MB Event data 0 3 MB Event data only 1 2 MB Maximum number of data points per channel that can be stored Data type Maximum number of data points per channel Display data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement
359. the saving ends 153 This action is not possible because formatting is in progress Wait till the formatting ends 155 The message is not written while sampling is stopped See sections 8 5 and 8 6 160 Cannot load the specified data Change the memory setting See sections 4 5 9 3 and 9 4 Operation Errors Errors related to external storage medium Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 200 Operation aborted because an error was found in media See Communication Interface User s Manual 201 Not enough free space on media Use another storage medium 202 Media is read only Release the write protection 210 Media has not been inserted Insert a storage medium into the drive 211 Media is damaged or not formatted Use another storage medium or carry out formatting 212 Format error Try formatting again or use another storage medium 213 The file is read only Access to other files or make the file write enable 214 There is no file or directory See Communication Interface User s Manual 215 Exceeded the allowable number of files Delete files or change storage medium 216 The file or directory name is incorrect See sections 8 9 and 9 1 217 Unknown file type Access to other files 218 Directory exists Delete the directory or change directory name See section 8 9 219 Invalid file or directory operation Cannot handle files and directories in the 2nd and de
360. time interval A file is created for each type of report such as hourly reports and daily reports Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive Dividing report files The report files are divided at the following times When data acquisition is stopped e For hourly reports When the 0 00 report is created every day When the number of data sets in the file reaches 25 e For daily reports When the report for the first day of the month is created every month e When the number of data sets in the file reaches 32 wnp n aHe10 sg jeusa xyq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead 8 5 Acquiring Display Data Procedure This operation is performed when the type of data acquired is set to Display or E D For setting the data acquisition method see sections 8 10 and 8 11 Start data acquisition To begin data acquisition press the START key The icon in the status display section will change accordingly icon GROUP 1 Tevet 2000 oo 12 30 G DISP EN Shour 1716 O Stop data acquisition 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens A Do you want to stop data storage ves om On models with the computation option the confirmation window displays the following choices Mem Math terminate acquisition a
361. timers These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press Press for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears To display the setting screen press the soft key O Timer lt TLOG No Node Interval Ref time Reset Action 1 th a 00 Off Off 2 Relative 01 00 off i 3 off H l rf y 1 5 2 6 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure Setting the relative timer i Mode Select Relative Interval Reset and Action are displayed Interval Set the time to the next timeout Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter the time Enter the time 00 01 to 24 00 and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Reset On Reset the TLOG value when the timer expires Off Do not reset the TLOG value when the timer expires Action DataSave Store the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels to the internal memory when the time expires Off
362. tion BT1 option the batch information is also displayed 2 Use the arrow keys to select Mem Math stop the data acquisition to the internal memory and computation or Mem stop the data acquisition and press the DISP ENTER key The icon that indicates the data acquisition to the internal memory turns to a stop icon The report stops Note When the report function is stopped the report file is closed When the report is restarted data are written to a new file Clearing the report data in the internal memory These procedures are carried out in the setting mode The report data are cleared along with the display data for example For the procedures see section 9 7 11 26 11 13 Setting the Report Function Basic Setting Mode Procedure Set the report type report channels the time and date to create the report The report function is set in the basic setting mode These procedures are carried out in the basic setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw Press To display the setting screen press the soft key 5 l r Report for 3 seconds The menu screen for the basic setting mode appears Report set Date Time
363. tion overflow e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Storing to the internal memory and Saving to the external storage medium Report data are stored to the internal memory at the end of each time interval The maximum number of report data files data set for each interval that can be stored in the internal memory is 40 For detail see chapter 8 11 25 uondo uonouny Woday uonejndwog 11 12 Using the Report Function Starting Stopping the report function Procedure The report start stop is in sync with the data acquisition start stop The report can also be started or stopped via remote control or communication commands For the remote control function see section 10 9 For the communication function see the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 Starting the report also starts the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the START key The icon that indicates the data acquisition to the internal memory turns to a start icon and the computation icon appears For details related to the status display section see section 4 2 The report function starts When the time to create the report arrives the report data are written to the internal memory Stopping the report also stops the data acquisition to the internal memory 1 Press the STOP key A confirmation window opens For models with the batch func
364. to 1100 0 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 T 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F ANSI IEC584 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1981 N 0 0 to 1300 0 C 32 to 2372 F Nicrosil Nisil IEC584 DIN IEC584 WwW 0 0 to 2315 0 C 32 to 4199 F W 5 Re W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co L 200 0 to 900 0 C 328 0 to 1652 0 F Fe CuNi DIN 43710 U 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F Cu CuNi DIN 43710 RTD Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C 328 0 to 1112 0 F JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 IEC751 DIN IEC751 JPt100 200 0 to 550 0 C 328 0 to 1022 0 F JIS C1604 1981 JIS C1606 1989 For the setting procedure of the reference junction compensation and the burnout for the thermocouple input see section 5 9 5 3 Digital Input DI Setting Procedure To measure the digital input follow the procedures below to set the input range The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press uw To display the setting screen press the soft key Oo l 1 First CH Last CH al Rang
365. to 20 mA to a 1 to 5 V Name Model Code Specification Shunt resistors 4159 20 250 Q 40 1 for screw terminals 4159 21 100 Q 40 1 4159 22 10 Q 40 1 Shunt resistors 4389 20 250 Q 0 1 for clamped terminals 4389 21 100 Q 0 1 4389 22 10 Q 40 1 5 2 Thermocouple TC Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Setting Procedure To measure TC and RTD signals follow the procedures below to set the input range The range cannot be changed while data acquisition or computation is in progress These procedures are carried out in the setting mode Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate parameter The parameters that cannot be changed are grayed The possible selections are displayed at the bottom of the screen Select using the soft keys The parameter boxes that are changed are displayed in yellow By confirming the new settings they change back to white Press To display the setting screen press the soft key owt First CH Last CH jar jar Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper R 60 1760 0 ea 2 3 4 1 First CH Last CH jar Jer Range Span Hode Range Lower Upper RTD PT 200 0 600 0 a 2 3 4 The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure i First channel and last channel Select the desired channels 2 Mode Set the mode to TC thermocouple or RTD resista
366. to save mode The data are acquired to the internal memory for the specified period from the point at which the data were previously saved to the external storage medium using key operation Then the data in the internal memory are saved to the storage medium This operation is repeated The following figure shows an example in which data are saved to the external storage medium at one hour intervals Execute data saving to the external storage medium using key operation 10 00 11 00 12 0012 20 13 20 Time gt I I I Save to external ue storage medium Saving the data to the storage medium using key operation All data in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium This cannot be executed while data acquisition or computation is in progress For the operating procedure see section 9 2 Note See section 9 7 or 9 8 to clear data in the internal memory 8 17 winipa abe10 sg jeusa xq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead e 8 8 Setting the Auto Save Interval for the Display Data Procedure When the method to save the data residing in the memory to the external storage medium is auto save you set the auto save interval The auto save interval is used in saving the display data e The display data residing in the internal memory is automatically saved to the external storage medium as a single file at each auto save interval e These procedures are carried out in the setting m
367. to the internal memory the value held is written Resetting the computation This is executable only when the computation is suspended Data from all computation channels are cleared Procedure Operation using the FUNC key 1 Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu The Math RESET soft key is displayed only when the computation is suspended 2 Pressing the Math RESET soft key clears the data from all computation channels Hath reset Operation using the USER key 1 Press the USER key to reset the computation data of all computation channels Clearing the computation dropout display When a computation data dropout occurs during computation the computation icon displayed in the status display section turns yellow The computation icon will return to a white color once the computation data dropout has been acknowledged Computation icon Es 1hour 1 16 ta GROUP 1 G DISP Jan 01 2000 22 42 18 aus LEE Procedure 1 Pressing the FUNC key displays the soft key menu The Math ACK soft key is displayed only when a computation data dropout occurs 2 Pressing the Math ACK soft key causes the yellow computation icon in the status display section to return to a white color Explanation Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval When this occurs frequently lower the CPU load by reducing the number of computation channels or making the scan interval longer
368. torage medium is indicated by the green level indicator in the icon The colored section indicating the level turns red when the amount of free space on the storage medium falls below 10 8 Computation icon Option Computation icon not displayed No computation option or computation is suspended White computation icon Computation in progress Yellow computation icon Computation data dropout occurred Note Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval The computation icon returns to the green icon by pressing FUNC gt MathACK soft key see section 11 3 If a computation dropout occurs make the scan interval longer see section 5 9 or reduce the number of computation channels that are turned On see section 11 4 9 Key lock icon Key icon Key lock ON No display Key lock OFF 10 Alarm icon Displayed when any one of the alarms is occurring For details see section 6 1 4 4 4 3 Using the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Operation Flow Diagram TREND DIGITAL BAR GRAPH Screen menu Sub menu Operation screens Screen menu Sub menu TREND gt A v gt v A Group channels i All channels Se Scale ON OFF DIGITAL A Auto scroll ON OFF BAR GRAPH gt y Numerical display ON OFF gt
369. transmission Connection method RS 422 A 485 4 wire half duplex multi drop connection 1 N where N 1 to 31 Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Data length 7 or 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit Parity Odd even or none Communication distance RS 422 A 485 Up to 1200 m Communication mode ASCII for input output for control and setting ASCII or binary for output of measured data Modbus Mode RTU SLAVE Data type Data read data write Wiring 4 wires for RS 422 A 485 VGA Output D5 The RD MV200 s screen can be displayed on a monitor via this terminal Only a VGA monitor or a multi synchronous monitor which is capable of displaying VGA can be used Resolution 640 by 480 dots VGA Connection D SUB 15 pin receptacle FAIL Memory End Output F1 The relay contact output on the rear panel informs of the occurrence of a system error Another relay contact output informs of the time until end of the internal memory space selectable from 1 2 5 10 20 50 or 100 hours before the data is overwritten or of the time when the remaining space on the external storage medium reaches to 10 of whole capacity suonesiioeds fa 14 11 14 6 SPECIFICATIONS OF OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Relay contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A 250 VDC 0 1 A for resistance load Computation Functions M1 Can perform computation display the computed data assigned to channels in trends and numerical values and sto
370. types Sum scale Off min h day Communication IP address Numerical value Ethernet Subnet mask Default gateway DNS On Off On Server search order Primary Numerical value Secondary Host name Character string Domain name Domain suffix search order Primary Character string Secondary Communication Baud rate 4800 Serial Data length Parity None RS 232 Handshaking Off Off XON XON XON RS CS RS RS 422A Address 3 4 485 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Protocol Memory out FTP transfer Disp amp Event data ie Report FTP connection FTP server name Character string Port number 21 Numerical value Login name Character string Password Account PASV mode On Initial pass Character string Ethernet login Use Not Use ed Level Admin User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User 6 On Off On Off User name Character string Password Application On timeout Time 1 to 120 min Numerical value Keep alive Off App 6 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files This section describes the data format of the ASCII file The RD MV200 creates two types of ASCII files the manual sampled data file and the report file Data format of the manual sampled data file The manual sampled data are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas The channel tag unit and manual sampled values are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or fo
371. ults option Math rst Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more Resets the data on all computation channels This is valid only on models with the computation function M1 option and while the computation is stopped For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect e Manual sampling M sample Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory 10 14 10 9 Setting the Remote Control Functions R1 Option Basic Setting Mode Loads the setup data Pnl1 load Pnl2 load PnI3 load e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more The setup data of the file LOAD 1 PNL LOAD 2 PNL or LOAD 3 PNL that is saved in the external storage medium are loaded for use The file LOAD 1 PNL LOAD 2 PNL or LOAD 3 PNL must be created and saved to the external storage medium beforehand Writing messages Message1 to Message8 Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend display The displayed message is also written to the internal memory When the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped messages cannot be displayed or written Applying a remote signal produces no effect
372. umber input and computing element input Each time the 1 M soft key is pressed the function of the character number input key switches between number input and computing element input The selected function is displayed to the right of the soft key display section 1 Number is selected M Computing element is selected Note When using TLOG computation timers must be set in the basic setting mode and the number of the timer and the sum unit only for TLOG SUM must be set in the setting mode 4 Upper and lower limits of span Set the upper and lower limits of the display span Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range given below and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Allowed range 9999999 to 99999999 The decimal can be set in the following positions OOOO OOOO Ooo O0ogd m Oooo Note The upper and lower limits of span cannot be set to the same value 5 Unit Set the unit Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter a character string Enter the unit up to 6 alphanumeric characters and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering character strings see Entering Characters on page 3 22 Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new setting
373. unction Basic Setting Mode Explanation Setting the interval for the rate of change alarm 6 Rate of change Increase Rate of change Decrease The time interval is specified using a number of sampling times Select the limit from 1 to 15 using the soft key Setting the alarm hysteresis 7 Hysteresis Select On or Off using the soft key On The hysteresis is 0 5 of the display span or scale Off No hysteresis Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Alarm output relay option A contact signal is generated when an alarm occurs The number of output relays is 2 to 24 points depends on the specification Reflash When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay this function notifies the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay operation Whena succeeding alarm occurs the output relay temporarily turns OFF The reflash alarm function is set only to output relays 101 102 and 103 The initial setting is Off Relays 111 112 113 are used for models without 101 to 106 a assuming 101 is assigned Channel 1 assuming 101 is assigned Alarm status Channel 2 assuming 101 is assigned Channel 3 oo oe on r 1 101 output Alarm relay status Output re
374. unit is changed Four lines from the bottom of the file example shows the output when the unit for channel 31 is changed from mV to V App 8 Appendix 2 Data Formats of ASCII Files Data format of the report file The hourly daily weekly and monthly reports are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas The channel tag unit average value maximum value minimum value and sum value are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF Example The following example is the daily report for four channels DAILY REPORT START TIME 2000 01 31 20 00 Model Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX File Header AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA CH TAG CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CHO4 UNIT VOOM 2000 01 01 00 00 Cc G7 Gy AVE 0 00 0 10 0 20 0 30 MAX 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 MIN 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 SUM 0 000000E 01 1 000000E 04 2 000000E 04 3 000000E 04 Status e Various events that occur while creating the report data are saved as status data and output in the report The positions of the various statuses in the report are fixed E Error an error is detected O Over an over range computation overflow is detected P Power failure a power disruption has occurred C Change the time has been ch
375. up changes in the reverse order Automatically switch the displayed groups stop the automatic switching The displayed group on the trend digital and bar graph displays can be automatically switched at the specified interval In each display the displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4 You can select 5s 10 s 20 s 30s and 1 min for the switch interval For the procedure related to setting the switch interval see section 7 13 1 On the trend digital and bar graph displays press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu To close the sub menu that you opened press the left arrow 3 To enable automatic switching select AUTO SCROLL ON using the up and down arrow keys To disable automatic switching select AUTO SCROLL OFF using the up and down arrow keys su 19 5 uopesado BulyosyuMs gt The one that is selectable is displayed in the sub menu 4 55 DIGITAL gt ul BAR gt m H H MEE AUTO SCROLL ON AUTO SCROLL ON 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to enable or disable the automatic switching of the displayed groups Displaying or clearing the numerical section on the trend screen This operation is carried out on the Trend screen 1 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu Trend is selected 2 Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key 3 Select DIGITAL ON or DIGI
376. ured Tax E E IHE V computed value E c C Seley 0 359 oo w Rir Y Unit O Eo Z 2 J nT 0 360 Pointer displayed using E the channel color E 0 360 22 Cit Alarm mark E E E to epee eset PAR d E ann Ea bon E 7 This area is displayed E E 0 361 using the channel color z h on i y seti hng i2 4 Trip line Scale Messages message mark time message Trend Display Vertical 3 9 Lt BA 9 L NER ia Lit ef Litt f a a 2 1 Scale 1 8 0 9 v0 0 0 9 1 8 Kanda en ETETA ETETI iri wtih Hobbit ee Cees let 9 8 hii Kuudi wulon ufu if Inin div i Trip line ierg Message esas HL Rd 0 643 v 0 643 v Unit OL 0 644 v 0 644 v Tag Channel no Alarm mark Measured computed value Updating the Waveform and Updating the Numerical Display One division on the RD MV200 consists of 30 dots on the LCD The displayed waveform is updated at an interval corresponding to one dot This interval is determined by the time period corresponding to one division referred to as the display update rate The relationship between the display update rate and the speed of movement of waveforms is as follows Display Update 15 s 30 s 1 min 2min 5min 10min 20 min 30min 1h 2h 4h Rate div Speed of movement 2376 1188 594 297 119 59 30 20 10 5 25 of waveforms approximate value mm h for RD MV204 and RD MV208 only Note ___ The speed of movement of the trend display
377. ured data acquired in the internal memory to a LCD in the form of waveforms numerical values and bar graphs The measured data can also be saved to external storage media such as floppy disks Zip disks and ATA flash memory cards RD MV200 External storage media sf M Floppy disk Zip disk a SZ ATA flash memory card The data that have been saved to an external storage medium can be displayed on a PC using the standard software that comes with the package The data can also be loaded into the RD MV200 to be displayed By using the Ethernet interface that comes standard with the RD MV200 the data can be transferred to a server on a network client function The data stored on the RD MV200 s external storage medium can also be read from a PC on the network server function RD MV200 RD MV200 Primary Secondary RD MV200 RD MV200 The communication functions such as the Ethernet interface are not covered in this manual See the RD MV100 RD MV200 Communication Interface User s Manual M3643 1 1 SUOIJOUNY JO MAIAJOAO 7 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Number of Measurement Channels Scan Interval The number of measurement channels and scan intervals for different models are listed in the table below For the procedure related to setting the scan interval see section 5 9 Model Number of Measurement Channels Scan interval RD MV204 4 channels 125 ms or 250 ms RD MV
378. utation About Reset For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the computing unit is set to min then 2s 60s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving a result that is close to the actual input value The scan interval unit is in seconds Off amp x measured value s measured value x scan interval min measured value x scan interval 60 h x measured value x scan interval 3600 For the setting procedure see section 11 8 Whether or not to reset the computed result at every timeout is selectable The figure below shows the action of TLOG SUM computation Example Result of the TLOG SUM computation Interval 1 2 3 Reset Reset Reset A 1 i Reset Off In case of TLOG MAX computation for example the maximum value is derived for every interval when Reset is On and the maximum value from the start of computation is derived when Reset is Off If power is lost while the TLOG computation was in progress The TLOG computation is resumed when the power is restored The operation varies depending on whether power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create the TLOG data Time of Recovery TLOG Computation Operation After the time to create TLOG data are created immediately when power is the TLOG data restored The measured computed data
379. uts and the F1 option 3 Replace the terminal cover and fasten it with screws Alarm Terminal Position Enclosed in parentheses are the relay numbers assigned to each option terminal wee AAi Option Terminal 1 101 to 106 Option Terminal 2 111 to 116 Option Terminal 3 121 to 126 Option Terminal 4 131 to 136 2 8 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 Option Terminal Arrangement Only the position of the alarm output terminals is indicated When the relay is not energized NC is closed and NO is open C is the common terminal A1 A1 R1 AR1 AR1 F1 A1 R1 F1 Option Terminal 1 ALARM 2 i A2 A2 R2 AR2 AR2 F1 A2 R1 F1 Option Terminal 1 A3 A3 R1 Option Terminal 1 A3 F1 A3 R1 F1 Option Terminal 2 A4 A4 R1 Option Terminal 1 2 9 OOZAIN GY 24 Bursn 21049 e 2 4 Alarm Output Wir
380. ve Manual manual save Note If Manual manual save is selected in step 1 set whether to save all the data in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved when the storage medium is inserted into the drive and the front cover is closed See section 8 9 Data acquisition Acquiring only the display data 2 Data Select Display Note If Auto auto save is selected in step 1 and Display is selected in step 2 set the auto save interval for the display data See section 8 8 8 23 winipay abe10 sg jeusa xyq 0 Hulaes pue uoljisinboy eead 8 11 Setting the Method of the Display Event Data Acquisition Basic Setting Mode Acquiring only the event data 2 Note Data Select Event Boxes used to set the method for event data acquisition are displayed Event Sample rate This is the sampling interval for the event data You cannot specify a sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval RD MV204 RD MV208 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 30 s 60 s and 120 s RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 30 s 60 s 120 s Event Mode Select from Free Trigger or Rotate If Free is selected item 6 is displayed If Trigger or Rotate is selected items 5 6 7 and 8 are displayed Event Block The event data storage area in the internal memory is divided by the specified number Select 1 2 4 8 or 16 Select
381. vent data 6 File list 7 Delete 8 Format 9 Clear data ttl A R 4 5 6 Next 1 2 Soft key Settings in the setting mode Title Item 1 Range 5 1 to 5 7 Input type Measurement range Upper and lower limits of span Reference channel for difference computation Upper and lower limits of scale Unit Alarm 6 2 Alarm type Alarm value Output relay On Off Output relay number 2 Tag 7 1 Tag name Filter 5 8 Filter time constant Off RD MV204 RD MV208 Moving average 5 8 Number of samples for the moving average Off RD MV210 RD MV220 RD MV230 Alarm delay time 6 3 3 Trend Save interval Trend display rate 7 3 Message 7 5 File 8 9 USER key 10 2 Auto save interval 8 8 Message string Header string to be written to file Name of directory to which data are to be saved Range of data to be saved during manual save Assign an action to the USER key Daylight savings time 10 14 Daylight savings time switch time 3 15 suoneiado uowwog 2poN UNy SHed JO SWEN 7 3 5 Configuring the Functions Soft key Settings in the setting mode Title Item 4 Display 4 1 Group set Trip line Group name 7 6 Assign channels to groups 7 6 Trip line position display color 7 7 4 2 Color 7 8 Measurement channel display color 4 3 Zone 7 9 Zone upper and lower limits Graph 7 10 Number of scale divisions for the trend and bar grap Bar graph base
382. was entered and the user name when using key login function are displayed Recalling the historical trend at the time the message was written This operation is carried out on the Message Summary screen 1 Select the message of which to display the historical trend using the up and down arrow keys 820 822 Message Time HESSAGE2 Jan 12 2088 84 37 16 MESSAGE Jan 12 2008 84 37 13 MESSAGE Jan 12 2008 84 37 11 Selected message j m HESSAGES Jan 12 2008 04 37 88 NESSAGE1 Jan 12 2008 84 37 02 HESSAGE2 Jan 12 2088 84 36 43 MESSAGE Jan 12 2808 04 36 41 Pressing the DISP ENTER displays the screen menu Pressing the right arrow key displays the sub menu To close the sub menu press the left arrow key Select JUMP TO HISTORY using the up and down arrow keys io INFOR Fai HATION i Pap JUMP TO HISTORY Pressing the DISP ENTER key displays the historical trend The displayed data type is as follows When configured to acquire only the display data to the internal memory Display data When configured to acquire only the event data to the internal memory Event data When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory Data type selected in the memory summary To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key 4 16 4 5 Using the Information Screen Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Memory Summary Number of data s
383. white Press mw Press the soft key Oos To display the setting screen press the soft key Oo l Group number 1 Group set Group name GROUP 1 CH Set 81 62 83 B4 05 06 07 88 89 18 Trip line The numbers in front of the operating procedure shown below correspond to the numbers in the above figure 1 Group number Select the group number 1 to 4 2 On Off Move the cursor to the desired trip line and press the On soft key On Use the trip line The Position and Color boxes appear Off Not use the trip line 3 Position display position Specify the display position of the trip line in the range 0 to 100 of the display span 4 Color Select the color of the trip line from 16 colors 7 10 7 7 Setting the Trip Line Trend Explanation Confirming operation To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the new settings press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Select Yes using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Initial colors of the trip lines Trip line No 1 Red Trip line No 2 Green Trip line No 3 Blue Trip line No 4 Yellow Available colors for the trip line Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray limes cyan dark blue yellow silver and purple 7 11 Aejdsig y Bulyesado pue Huas 7 8 Setting the Channel Display Colors Trend Bar Gra
384. will occur under these conditions with serious damage which is impossible to repair however calibration may be necessary to recover normal operation performance Ambient temperature Humidity Vibration Shock Other Specifications Clock Daylight saving Accuracy of clock Memory backup Key lock function Key login function Insulation resistance 25 C to 60 C 5 to 95 RH No condensation is allowed 10 to 60 Hz 4 9 m s maximum 392 m s maximum while being packed With calendar function year of grace The time can be adjusted by a remote contact with the remote control option Summer and wintertime can be set 100 ppm excluding a delay of 1 second maximum caused each time the power is turned on A built in lithium battery backs up the setup parameters battery life approximately ten years at room temperature ON OFF and password can be set Power on with log out mode and all key operations are not permitted User name User ID and password are required to enter the operation mode Each terminal to ground terminal 20 MQ or greater at 500 VDC suonesiioeds 14 17 14 7 General Specifications Dielectric strength Safety and EMC Standards Safety standards EMC standards Power supply to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute for AC power supply model Power supply to ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute for 12 VDC power sup
385. wire resistance 10 2 max wire The resistance of the three wires should be approximately equal Thermocouple Input Extension leadwire AN OOZAIN GY eu Bursn 21049 e DC Current Input t DC current input 2 Shunt resistor NOTE For a 4 to 20 mA input use a shunt resistor of 250 Q 0 1 2 7 2 4 Alarm Output Wiring AR1 AR2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 Option A Wiring Procedure To prevent electric shock ensure the main power supply is turned OFF e lf a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied to the alarm output terminal use ring tongue crimp on lugs with insulation sleeves on all terminals to prevent the wires from slipping out when the screws become loose Furthermore use double insulated wires dielectric strength of 2300 VAC or more for the signal wires on which a voltage of more than 30 VAC or 60 VDC is to be applied For all other wires use basic insulated wires dielectric strength of 1350 VAC To prevent electric shock attach the terminal cover after wiring and make sure not to touch the terminals 1 Turn OFF the RD MV200 and remove the cover for the option terminal 2 Connect the alarm output wires to the terminal The terminal arrangement will be one of the figures shown below depending on the alarm output relay option number of outp
386. wise in 1 Status e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 e1 0 e240 e10Re2 1 e140 e240 e10Re2 1 XOR Mutually exclusive logical sum Syntax e1XORe2 Condition If e1 and e2 have different values the operation results in 1 otherwise in 0 Status e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e240 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e240 e1XORe2 0 NOT Logical negation Syntax NOTet1 Condition Reverses the value of data e1 Status e1 0 NOTe1 1 e1 0 NOTe1 0 EXAMPLE 01 020R03 GT 04 Determines the OR of the computed results of 01 02 and 03 GT 04 11 2 Explanation of Computing Equations TLOG Computation MAX MIN AVE SUM MAX MIN Only measurement channels and computation channels can be used in the TLOG computation In the explanation below e1 is used to represent a measurement or computation channel You cannot specify an equation that contains a computing element inside e1 In addition only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing equation TLOG MAX Syntax TLOG MAX e1 Result Computes the maximum value of channel e1 TLOG MIN Syntax TLOG MIN e1 Result Computes the minimum value of channel e1 TLOG AVE Syntax TLOG AVE e1 Result Computes the average value of channel e1 TLOG SUM Syntax TLOG SUM e1 Result Computes the summation of channel e1 TLOG P P Syntax TLOG SUM e1 Result Computes the maximum valu
387. y when acquiring the event data to the internal memory using the trigger or rotate mode the acquisition start trigger is set to external trigger and the RD MV200 is in the trigger wait state see section 8 2 For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect e Releasing the alarm indication and output relay AlarmACK Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Releases the alarm indication and relay output option This is the same function as when the Alarm ACK soft key is pressed Adjusting the internal clock Time adj Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Adjusts the internal clock of the RD MV200 to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied Time of signal input New time 00 min 00 s to 01 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hr 00 min 00 s 02 min 00 s to 57 min 59s Time is unchanged 58 min 00 s to 59 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hr 00 min 00 s e Starts stops computation option Math e Remote input Rising start falling stop e Starts stops the computation This is valid only on models with the computation function M1 option e If the computation is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the computation is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect Clears computed res
388. ys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 Note Span lower limit and span upper limit cannot be set to the same value sBuinjes jeuueyo jusweinseay 7 5 6 Square Root Computation Setting Explanation 5 Note Scale lower limit and scale upper limit cannot be set to the same value The RD MV200 converts the measured data within a value span derived by removing the decimal from the scaling upper and lower limits In other words conversion is performed by using a span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 to 5 and 100 if the scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 The resolution of the value derived by using a span of 10 is coarser than the value derived using a span of 100 Because the display becomes rough set this value so that it is greater tha Upper and lower limits of scale Set the upper and lower limits of the scale Pressing the Input soft key or one of the character number input keys displays a window used to enter a numerical value Enter a value in the allowed range and press the DISP ENTER key For the procedures related to entering numerical values see Entering Numbers on page 3 21 e Allowed range 30000 to 30000 Decimal position The decimal can be set in the following positions TEE Ieee Oudd m Oo0dod The decimal position

RD-MV200 Series Recorder User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents